小空经注释显示巴利原文
1. Cūḷasuññatasuttavaṇṇanā
176 这部《小空经》以“如是我闻”开头。其中“有一事”等语:据说,长老侍奉世尊后,便前往自己白天的住处,设定时间,进入以涅槃为所缘的空果定,安坐其中,于预定时间出定。那时,诸行以空的面貌显现,他便生起想听闻空论的心。当时他这样思惟:“我不能像用车辕撞击车辕般鲁莽,直接跑去对世尊说:‘尊者,请为我说空论。’不如我提起世尊过去依一小城镇而住时曾说过的话题,这样世尊就会为我说空论了。”如此思惟后,他提醒十力者时,便说了“有一事”等语。显示巴利原文
176.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷasuññatasuttaṃ. Tattha ekamidanti thero kira bhagavato vattaṃ katvā attano divāṭṭhānaṃ gantvā kālaparicchedaṃ katvā nibbānārammaṇaṃ suññatāphalasamāpattiṃ appetvā nisinno yathāparicchedena vuṭṭhāsi. Athassa saṅkhārā suññato upaṭṭhahiṃsu. So suññatākathaṃ sotukāmo jāto. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘na kho pana sakkā dhurena dhuraṃ paharantena viya gantvā ‘suññatākathaṃ me, bhante, kathethā’ti bhagavantaṃ vattuṃ, handāhaṃ yaṃ me bhagavā nagarakaṃ upanissāya viharanto ekaṃ kathaṃ kathesi, taṃ sāremi, evaṃ me bhagavā suññatākathaṃ kathessatī’’ti dasabalaṃ sārento ekamidantiādimāha.
其中,“id”仅是一个小品词。那位长老能立足一句而受持六万句,岂会不能受持“以空住”这一句?他虽想听,但若以明知故问的方式提问则不恰当。他渴望空论被详加阐释、明白开演,因此装作不知而问。实际上,即便是不知道的人,也能装得像知道一样。长老为何要如此做呢?在自己明知的情况下,他也是在向世尊表达恭敬之后,才说出“或许这”等话的。显示巴利原文
Tattha idanti nipātamattameva. Kaccimetaṃ, bhanteti thero ekapade ṭhatvā saṭṭhipadasahassāni uggahetvā dhāretuṃ samattho, kiṃ so ‘‘suññatāvihārenā’’ti ekaṃ padaṃ dhāretuṃ na sakkhissati, sotukāmena pana jānantena viya pucchituṃ na vaṭṭati, pākaṭaṃ katvā vitthāriyamānaṃ suññatākathaṃ sotukāmo ajānanto viya evamāha. Eko ajānantopi jānanto viya hoti, thero evarūpaṃ kohaññaṃ kiṃ karissati, attano jānanaṭṭhānepi bhagavato apacitiṃ dassetvā ‘‘kaccimeta’’ntiādimāha.
世尊如此思惟后,心想:“阿难想听空论。但有些人只能听,不能受持;有些人既能听也能受持,却不能讲说;而阿难既能听,也能受持,还能讲说。我要为他说空论。”这样思惟后,便开始宣说空论,说道:“譬如”等。其中,“空于象、牛、马、母马”是指:在那里,有以木材、布料、彩绘等方式所造的象等;有多闻天王、曼陀多等宫殿中以壁画等形式所绘制的;也有为了庄严而安设的窗、门闩、床、椅等物,以及为了修理陈旧物品而存放的金银;还有以木像等形式制作的象等,以及前来听法、提问的男女人众。因此,那里并非完全没有这些事物。所谓“空”,指的是缺乏那些能系缚诸根、有意识的象等,缺乏可以随意受用的金银,以及缺乏常住于那里的男女。显示巴利原文
Pubbepīti paṭhamabodhiyaṃ nagarakaṃ upanissāya viharaṇakālepi. Etarahipīti idānipi. Evaṃ pana vatvā cintesi – ‘‘ānando suññatākathaṃ sotukāmo, eko pana sotuṃ sakkoti, na uggahetuṃ, eko sotumpi uggahetumpi sakkoti, na kathetuṃ, ānando pana sotumpi sakkoti uggahetumpi kathetumpi, (kathemissa) suññatākatha’’nti. Iti taṃ kathento seyyathāpītiādimāha. Tattha suñño hatthigavāssavaḷavenāti tattha kaṭṭharūpapotthakarūpacittarūpavasena katā hatthiādayo atthi, vessavaṇamandhātādīnaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhāne cittakammavasena katampi, ratanaparikkhatānaṃ vātapānadvārabandhamañcapīṭhādīnaṃ vasena saṇṭhitampi, jiṇṇapaṭisaṅkharaṇatthaṃ ṭhapitampi jātarūparajataṃ atthi, kaṭṭharūpādivasena katā dhammasavanapañhapucchanādivasena āgacchantā ca itthipurisāpi atthi, tasmā na so tehi suñño. Indriyabaddhānaṃ saviññāṇakānaṃ hatthiādīnaṃ, icchiticchitakkhaṇe paribhuñjitabbassa jātarūparajatassa, nibaddhavāsaṃ vasantānaṃ itthipurisānañca abhāvaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
「缘比丘僧团」:因为即使有比丘入村乞食,也还有接受房舍饭食的比丘,以及生病者、照顾病人者、担任唱诵与做衣等事务的比丘,那地方便并非空无一人;正因为常常有比丘住众,所以这样说。‘单一’:指一个存在,即不空的存在。意思是存在一个不空的状态。‘不作意’:即不用心作意、不转向、不审查。‘村想’:由‘村’之名言而生,或由烦恼所生的想。‘人想’也是如此。‘缘林想而作意单一’:即‘这是林、这是树、这是山、这是青翠的丛林’,如此唯依林想而作意单一。‘投入’:指进入其中。‘胜解’:即如此确定。‘那些热恼’:那些因村想可能生起的运转热恼或烦恼热恼,在此因林想而不存在。第二句也是如此。‘然而,这种热恼的程度还存在’:即唯依林想而生起的运转热恼分量,它是存在的。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhusaṅghaṃ paṭiccāti bhikkhūsu hi piṇḍāya paviṭṭhesupi vihārabhattaṃ sādiyantehi bhikkhūhi ceva gilānagilānupaṭṭhākauddesacīvarakammapasutādīhi ca bhikkhūhi so asuññova hoti, iti niccampi bhikkhūnaṃ atthitāya evamāha. Ekattanti ekabhāvaṃ, ekaṃ asuññataṃ atthīti attho. Eko asuññabhāvo atthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Amanasikaritvāti citte akatvā anāvajjitvā apaccavekkhitvā. Gāmasaññanti gāmoti pavattavasena vā kilesavasena vā uppannaṃ gāmasaññaṃ. Manussasaññāyapi eseva nayo. Araññasaññaṃ paṭicca manasi karoti ekattanti idaṃ araññaṃ, ayaṃ rukkho, ayaṃ pabbato, ayaṃ nīlobhāso vanasaṇḍoti evaṃ ekaṃ araññaṃyeva paṭicca araññasaññaṃ manasi karoti. Pakkhandatīti otarati. Adhimuccatīti evanti adhimuccati. Ye assu darathāti ye ca pavattadarathā vā kilesadarathā vā gāmasaññaṃ paṭicca bhaveyyuṃ, te idha araññasaññāya na santi. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Atthi cevāyanti ayaṃ pana ekaṃ araññasaññaṃ paṭicca uppajjamānā pavattadarathamattā atthi.
「即在那里不存在」:如同在鹿母讲堂中象等不存在,在此林想中,由村想、人想所生的运转热恼与烦恼热恼,是不存在的。‘在那里剩余存在的’:如同鹿母讲堂中有比丘僧团存在,在那场合中,林想所生的运转热恼分量便是残余存在的。‘知“有此,此为存在”’:即如实了知那残余的存在为‘此正是存在’,这便是‘空之进入’,也就是空之成就。显示巴利原文
Yañhikho tattha na hotīti yaṃ migāramātupāsāde hatthiādayo viya imissā araññasaññāya gāmasaññāmanussasaññāvasena uppajjamānaṃ pavattadarathakilesadarathajātaṃ, taṃ na hoti. Yaṃ pana tattha avasiṭṭhanti yaṃ migāramātupāsāde bhikkhusaṅgho viya tattha araññasaññāya pavattadarathamattaṃ avasiṭṭhaṃ hoti. Taṃ santamidaṃ atthīti pajānātīti taṃ vijjamānameva ‘‘atthi ida’’nti pajānāti, suññatāvakkantīti suññatānibbatti.
177 「不作意人想」:在此,他不执取村落想。为什么?据说他这样想:“以人想去除村落想,以林想去除人想,以地想去除林想,以空无边处想去除地想……乃至以无所有处想去除非想非非想处想,以观去除非想非非想处想,以道去除观,如此我将次第显示究竟空。”因此,他这样开始说法。其中,「地想」:为什么舍弃林想而作意地想?因为由林想不能证得殊胜。正如有人看到一块可爱的田地后想:“这里种的稻谷等会长得很好,我将得到大利益”,即使他反复七次观察那块田地,稻谷也不会长好;但如果他把那块地上的树桩、荆棘清除干净,耕犁之后再去播种,这样才会长好。同样,即使七次作意“这是林,这是树,这是山,这是青翠的丛林”这样的林想,也既达不到近行,也达不到定;而如果以地遍为常修习的业处,作地遍的遍作之后,生起诸禅那,再以禅那为近因增长观,就能够证得阿罗汉。因此,他舍弃林想而作意地想。「缘」:指缘所生。显示巴利原文
177.Amanasikaritvāmanussasaññanti idha gāmasaññaṃ na gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘manussasaññāya gāmasaññaṃ nivattetvā, araññasaññāya manussasaññaṃ, pathavīsaññāya araññasaññaṃ, ākāsānañcāyatanasaññāya pathavīsaññaṃ…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasaññāya ākiñcaññāyatanasaññaṃ , vipassanāya nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasaññaṃ, maggena vipassanaṃ nivattetvā anupubbena accantasuññataṃ nāma dassessāmī’’ti. Tasmā evaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha pathavīsaññanti kasmā araññasaññaṃ pahāya pathavīsaññaṃ manasi karoti? Araññasaññāya visesānadhigamanato. Yathā hi purisassa ramaṇīyaṃ khettaṭṭhānaṃ disvā – ‘‘idha vuttā sāliādayo suṭṭhu sampajjissanti, mahālābhaṃ labhissāmī’’ti sattakkhattumpi khettaṭṭhānaṃ olokentassa sāliādayo na sampajjanteva, sace pana taṃ ṭhānaṃ vihatakhāṇukakaṇṭakaṃ katvā kasitvā vapati, evaṃ sante sampajjanti, evameva – ‘‘idaṃ araññaṃ, ayaṃ rukkho, ayaṃ pabbato, ayaṃ nīlobhāso vanasaṇḍo’’ti sacepi sattakkhattuṃ araññasaññaṃ manasi karoti, nevūpacāraṃ na samādhiṃ pāpuṇāti, pathavīsaññāya panassa dhuvasevanaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pathavīkasiṇaṃ parikammaṃ katvā jhānāni nibbattetvā jhānapadaṭṭhānampi vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā sakkā arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ. Tasmā araññasaññaṃ pahāya pathavīsaññaṃ manasi karoti. Paṭiccāti paṭicca sambhūtaṃ.
现在,为了显示他所缘取的那个地遍——即他成为“地想者”的那个地遍——的譬喻,而说了“比如”等语。此处,“牛皮的”指牛王的皮。其他普通牛的皮会有疮疤和鞭痕,那些牛的皮在拉伸时不会变得无皱,而牛王因为具足相好,没有那些缺陷,所以取用它的皮。“以百钉”即以百根桩子。“善彻底地张好”指把它拉开之后,很好地绷平了。因为用不足百根桩子张开的皮会有皱,而用百根桩子张开的皮,就像鼓面一样无皱,所以这样说。“高处与低处”指高地和低洼处,即高起的地方和凹陷的地方。“河与难行处”指河流和难以通行的地方。“缘地想而作意于单一”指:只缘取地遍,并作意由缘彼所生的那单一的想。关于“热恼的程度”:从这里开始,于一切处都应理解为,依转起的热恼而称为热恼的程度。显示巴利原文
Idāni yasmiṃ pathavīkasiṇe so pathavīsaññī hoti, tassa opammadassanatthaṃ seyyathāpītiādimāha. Tattha usabhassa etanti āsabhaṃ. Aññesaṃ pana gunnaṃ gaṇḍāpi honti pahārāpi. Tesañhi cammaṃ pasāriyamānaṃ nibbalikaṃ na hoti, usabhassa lakkhaṇasampannatāya te dosā natthi. Tasmā tassa cammaṃ gahitaṃ. Saṅkusatenāti khilasatena. Suvihatanti pasāretvā suṭṭhu vihataṃ. Ūnakasatasaṅkuvihatañhi nibbalikaṃ na hoti, saṅkusatena vihataṃ bheritalaṃ viya nibbalikaṃ hoti. Tasmā evamāha. Ukkūlavikkūlanti uccanīcaṃ thalaṭṭhānaṃ ninnaṭṭhānaṃ. Nadīvidugganti nadiyo ceva duggamaṭṭhānañca. Pathavīsaññaṃ paṭicca manasi karoti ekattanti kasiṇapathaviyaṃyeva paṭicca sambhūtaṃ ekaṃ saññaṃ manasi karoti. Darathamattāti ito paṭṭhāya sabbavāresu pavattadarathavasena darathamattā veditabbā.
182 “无相心定”:指观的心定。因为它远离了常相等相,所以称为“无相”。“即以此身”:指出了观的所依。在此,“即以此”指这个四大所成之身。“六处相应的”:与六处相关联。“依命根”:只要命根还在运转,就依止于命根而有转起的热恼程度存在。这是所说之意。显示巴利原文
182.Animittaṃ cetosamādhinti vipassanācittasamādhiṃ. So hi niccanimittādivirahito animittoti vuccati. Imameva kāyanti vipassanāya vatthuṃ dasseti. Tattha imamevāti imaṃ eva catumahābhūtikaṃ. Saḷāyatanikanti saḷāyatanapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ. Jīvitapaccayāti yāva jīvitindriyānaṃ pavatti, tāva jīvitapaccayā pavattadarathamattā atthīti vuttaṃ hoti.
183 再次说“无相”,是为了显示对观的反观。“缘欲漏”:这里没有缘欲漏而生起、转起的热恼,这是说,在圣道和圣果中都不存在。“即以此身”:这是为了显示有余依的热恼而说的。就这样,以人想去除村落想……乃至以道去除观之后,便次第地显示了名为“究竟空”的真理。显示巴利原文
183. Puna animittanti vipassanāya paṭivipassanaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Kāmāsavaṃ paṭiccāti kāmāsavaṃ paṭicca uppajjanapavattadarathā idha na santi, ariyamagge ceva ariyaphale ca natthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Imameva kāyanti imaṃ upādisesadarathadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Iti manussasaññāya gāmasaññaṃ nivattetvā…pe… maggena vipassanaṃ nivattetvā anupubbena accantasuññatā nāma dassitā hoti.
184 「清净」:指无杂染烦恼。「无上」:指无有更上者,为一切中最殊胜。「空」:指空果定。「因此」:过去诸佛、独觉佛、佛弟子等沙门婆罗门,未来及现在诸佛、佛弟子等沙门婆罗门,都已证得、当证得或现证得这同样的清净、最胜、无上之空而安住,故而如此说。其余各处皆是易明的。显示巴利原文
184.Parisuddhanti nirupakkilesaṃ. Anuttaranti uttaravirahitaṃ sabbaseṭṭhaṃ. Suññatanti suññataphalasamāpattiṃ. Tasmāti yasmā atītepi, buddhapaccekabuddhabuddhasāvakasaṅkhātā samaṇabrāhmaṇā. Anāgatepi, etarahipi buddhabuddhasāvakasaṅkhātā samaṇabrāhmaṇā imaṃyeva parisuddhaṃ paramaṃ anuttaraṃ suññataṃ upasampajja vihariṃsu viharissanti viharanti ca, tasmā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
2.《大空经》注释显示巴利原文
2. Mahāsuññatasuttavaṇṇanā
185 「如是我闻」:此为《大空经》。其中,「黑堪玛咖的」:因其肤色黝黑,故名黑;“堪玛咖”是他的名字。「寺院」:即在那榕树林中的一处地方,筑起围墙,建了门楼,并安置了鹅形座等坐卧具,以及圆堂、食堂等,如此建造的居所,称为寺院。「众多坐卧具」:是指床、凳、褥垫、枕头、席子、皮片、草敷具、叶敷具、秆敷具等设施,被放置得床挨着床……乃至秆敷具挨着秆敷具,看上去就像众多比丘同住一处一般。显示巴利原文
185.Evaṃme sutanti mahāsuññatasuttaṃ. Tattha kāḷakhemakassāti chavivaṇṇena so kāḷo, khemakoti panassa nāmaṃ. Vihāroti tasmiṃyeva nigrodhārāme ekasmiṃ padese pākārena parikkhipitvā dvārakoṭṭhakaṃ māpetvā haṃsavaṭṭakādisenāsanāni ceva maṇḍalamāḷabhojanasālādīni ca patiṭṭhapetvā kato vihāro. Sambahulāni senāsanānīti mañco pīṭhaṃ bhisibimbohanaṃ taṭṭikā cammakhaṇḍo tiṇasanthāro paṇṇasanthāro palālasanthārotiādīni paññattāni honti, mañcena mañcaṃ…pe… palālasanthāreneva palālasanthāraṃ āhacca ṭhapitāni, gaṇabhikkhūnaṃ vasanaṭṭhānasadisaṃ ahosi.
「众多吗?」:因世尊在菩提座上已断尽一切烦恼,故无疑惑;此仅是寻思前分的发问,其中的“吗”字只是语气助词。当比丘们前往亲见时,便不再有犹豫不决之事。据说,在此之前,世尊从未见过十个或十二位比丘同住一处。显示巴利原文
Sambahulānu khoti bhagavato bodhipallaṅkeyeva sabbakilesānaṃ samugghāṭitattā saṃsayo nāma natthi, vitakkapubbabhāgā pucchā, vitakkapubbabhāge cāyaṃ nukāro nipātamatto. Pāṭimatthakaṃ gacchante avinicchito nāma na hoti. Ito kira pubbe bhagavatā dasa dvādasa bhikkhū ekaṭṭhāne vasantā na diṭṭhapubbā.
他便这样想:“所谓的群居,在轮回中久成惯习,犹如汇入河流之水,遍及一切。地狱、畜生道、鬼趣、阿修罗身,乃至人界、天界、梵天界,无处不是群居。那方圆一万由旬的地狱,犹如塞满碎铜屑的竹筒,众生拥挤,并无间隙;在有五种系缚、造作恶业之处,众生无量无边,不可限量;在刀砍斧劈之处,亦复如是——他们就这样聚集成群而受苦。在畜生道,一个蚁丘中的蚁众多如优婆夷,难以计数;各个洞穴中的蚁类等同然,畜生道中也尽为群居。饿鬼城,或长一牛呼,或广半由旬,都塞满了饿鬼:如是,鬼趣亦是群居。阿修罗宫虽广一万由旬,却如针孔般挤得满满当当:如是,阿修罗身中亦是群居。人界之中,舍卫城有五十七万户,王舍城内外居住着一亿八千万人;他方亦尔:人界亦是群居。自地居天以上,天界、梵天界也无一不是群居。须知,每一位天子都有两万五千乃至九俱胝的歌舞眷属,甚至有一万梵天同住一处。”显示巴利原文
Athassa etadahosi – gaṇavāso nāmāyaṃ vaṭṭe āciṇṇasamāciṇṇo nadīotiṇṇaudakasadiso, nirayatiracchānayonipettivisayāsurakāyesupi, manussaloka-devalokabrahmalokesupi gaṇavāsova āciṇṇo. Dasayojanasahasso hi nirayo tipucuṇṇabharitā nāḷi viya sattehi nirantaro, pañcavidhabandhanakammakāraṇakaraṇaṭṭhāne sattānaṃ pamāṇaṃ vā paricchedo vā natthi, tathā vāsīhi tacchanādiṭhānesu, iti gaṇabhūtāva paccanti. Tiracchānayoniyaṃ ekasmiṃ vammike upasikānaṃ pamāṇaṃ vā paricchedo vā natthi, tathā ekekabilādīsupi kipillikādīnaṃ. Tiracchānayoniyampi gaṇavāsova. Petanagarāni ca gāvutikāni aḍḍhayojanikānipi petabharitāni honti. Evaṃ pettivisayepi gaṇavāsova. Asurabhavanaṃ dasayojanasahassaṃ kaṇṇe pakkhittasūciyā kaṇṇabilaṃ viya hoti. Iti asurakāyepi gaṇavāsova. Manussaloke sāvatthiyaṃ sattapaṇṇāsa kulasatasahassāni, rājagahe anto ca bahi ca aṭṭhārasa manussakoṭiyo vasiṃsu. Evaṃ aññesupi ṭhānesūti manussalokepi gaṇavāsova. Bhummadevatā ādiṃ katvā devalokabrahmalokesupi gaṇavāsova. Ekekassa hi devaputtassa aḍḍhatiyā nāṭakakoṭiyo honti, navapi koṭiyo honti, ekaṭṭhāne dasasahassāpi brahmāno vasanti.
他便这样想:“我为摧破群居,于四个不可计数大劫又十万劫中修习十波罗蜜,而这些比丘从始至终结成群体,耽著群居,行不相应之事。”他生起对法的悚惧后,又这样想:“若有可能,我便会制定‘两位比丘不应同住一处’的学处,但这并不可行。既如此,我便宣说一部名为《大空行经》的经吧。对于乐于修学的善男子们,此经将如同学处规条,也如同挂在城门上的全身镜。正如刹帝利等人在镜中看见自身缺点,便能舍弃而成为无缺点者;同样,在我般涅槃后的五千年中,善男子们将思维此经,驱散群聚,乐于独处,终将结束轮回之苦。”世尊的心愿似乎得到满足:有众多善男子,通过思维此经、驱散群聚、灭尽轮回之苦而般涅槃,数量多到无法计算。据说,在瓦利卡皮陀寺,有一位名为无畏的论师,在入雨安居时与众多比丘一同诵习此经后说:“正自觉者是这样教导的,我们又在做什么呢?”那些比丘尽皆在雨安居期间驱散群聚,乐于独处,证得阿拉汉果。因此,此经被称为《散群经》。显示巴利原文
Tato cintesi – ‘‘mayā satasahassakappādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni gaṇavāsaviddhaṃsanatthaṃ dasa pāramiyo pūritā, ime ca bhikkhū ito paṭṭhāyeva gaṇaṃ bandhitvā gaṇābhiratā jātā ananucchavikaṃ karontī’’ti. So dhammasaṃvegaṃ uppādetvā puna cintesi – ‘‘sace ‘ekaṭṭhāne dvīhi bhikkhūhi na vasitabba’nti sakkā bhaveyya sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetuṃ, sikkhāpadaṃ paññāpeyyaṃ, na kho panetaṃ sakkā. Handāhaṃ mahāsuññatāpaṭipattiṃ nāma suttantaṃ desemi, yaṃ sikkhākāmānaṃ kulaputtānaṃ sikkhāpadapaññatti viya nagaradvāre nikkhittasabbakāyikaādāso viya ca bhavissati. Tato yathā nāmekasmiṃ ādāse khattiyādayo attano vajjaṃ disvā taṃ pahāya anavajjā honti, evamevaṃ mayi parinibbutepi pañcavassasahassāni imaṃ suttaṃ āvajjitvā gaṇaṃ vinodetvā ekībhāvābhiratā kulaputtā vaṭṭadukkhassa antaṃ karissantī’’ti. Bhagavato ca manorathaṃ pūrentā viya imaṃ suttaṃ āvajjitvā gaṇaṃ vinodetvā vaṭṭadukkhaṃ khepetvā parinibbutā kulaputtā gaṇanapathaṃ vītivattā. Vālikapiṭṭhivihārepi hi ābhidhammikaabhayatthero nāma vassūpanāyikasamaye sambahulehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ imaṃ suttaṃ sañjhāyitvā ‘‘sammāsambuddho evaṃ kāreti, mayaṃ kiṃ karomā’’ti āha. Te sabbepi antovasse gaṇaṃ vinodetvā ekībhāvābhiratā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Gaṇabhedanaṃ nāma idaṃ suttanti.
186 “在嘎塔家”:指一位名叫嘎塔的释迦族人的住处。“寺院”:应知此寺院位于榕树园的一处,如同咖拉咖马寺院那样建造的。“做衣事”:包括对旧脏衣服进行补缀、清洗等修整,也包括对新获布料进行裁剪、缝制等尚未完成的工作;此处指的是未完成的工作。据说,当时有人布施衣料给阿难长老,长老便带着众多比丘在那里做衣事。那些比丘从早晨能看见针线之时坐着缝起,直到看不见了才起身。他们心想:“等缝完衣,我们再去整理坐卧处。”因此便没有整理。当长老(阿难)说“不做衣的时候”,他是这样考虑的:“这些比丘肯定没有收拾床座,世尊也已看见。由此,导师不悦,想要严厉呵责他们。我要为这些比丘作支撑。”所以才那样说。然而阿难的真正心意是:“尊者,这些比丘并非耽著事务,他们只是因为做衣的因缘才这样住在一起的。”显示巴利原文
186.Ghaṭāyāti evaṃnāmakassa sakkassa. Vihāreti ayampi vihāro nigrodhārāmasseva ekadese kāḷakhemakassa vihāro viya katoti veditabbo. Cīvarakammanti jiṇṇamalinānaṃ aggaḷaṭṭhānuppādanadhovanādīhi kataparibhaṇḍampi, cīvaratthāya uppannavatthānaṃ vicāraṇasibbanādīhi akataṃ saṃvidhānampi vaṭṭati, idha pana akataṃ saṃvidhānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Manussā hi ānandattherassa cīvarasāṭake adaṃsu. Tasmā thero sambahule bhikkhū gahetvā tattha cīvarakammaṃ akāsi. Tepi bhikkhū pātova sūcipāsakassa paññāyanakālato paṭṭhāya nisinnā apaññāyanakāle uṭṭhahanti. Sūcikamme niṭṭhiteyeva senāsanāni saṃvidahissāmāti na saṃvidahiṃsu. Cīvarakārasamayo noti thero kira cintesi – ‘‘addhā etehi bhikkhūhi na paṭisāmitāni senāsanāni, bhagavatā ca diṭṭhāni bhavissanti. Iti anattamano satthā suṭṭhu niggahetukāmo, imesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ upatthambho bhavissāmī’’ti; tasmā evamāha. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo – ‘‘na, bhante, ime bhikkhū kammārāmā eva, cīvarakiccavasena pana evaṃ vasantī’’ti.
“Na kho, ānanda”(阿难,并非如此)意为:阿难,无论是有事可做还是无事可做,无论是有衣事还是无衣事之时,喜欢聚会的比丘终究不光彩。你不要在不该扶持的地方去扶持。这里,“聚会”是指与自己的徒众聚集一处;“群体”是指与各种各样的人混杂在一起。因此,无论是喜欢聚会还是喜欢群体,凡是热衷众会、被群体纽带系缚的比丘,都不光彩。相反,午后打扫日间住处,洗净手脚,执取根本业处,乐于独处的比丘,才在佛陀教法中光彩。“出离乐”是指从欲乐中出离后所得的欢乐。“远离乐”也是指远离欲乐的欢乐。而“止息乐”能导向贪等烦恼的止息。“正觉乐”能导向圣道的觉悟。“易得者”就是随其所欲、随其所愿而得的人。“不难获得者”就是无苦而获得的人。“广大获得者”就是丰足而获得的人。显示巴利原文
Na kho, ānandāti, ānanda, kammasamayo vā hotu akammasamayo vā, cīvarakārasamayo vā hotu acīvarakārasamayo vā, atha kho saṅgaṇikārāmo bhikkhu na sobhatiyeva. Mā tvaṃ anupatthambhaṭṭhāne upatthambho ahosīti. Tattha saṅgaṇikāti sakaparisasamodhānaṃ. Gaṇoti nānājanasamodhānaṃ. Iti saṅgaṇikārāmo vā hotu gaṇārāmo vā, sabbathāpi gaṇabāhullābhirato gaṇabandhanabaddho bhikkhu na sobhati. Pacchābhatte pana divāṭṭhānaṃ sammajjitvā sudhotahatthapādo mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā ekārāmatamanuyutto bhikkhu buddhasāsane sobhati. Nekkhammasukhanti kāmato nikkhantassa sukhaṃ. Pavivekasukhampi kāmapavivekasukhameva. Rāgādīnaṃ pana vūpasamatthāya saṃvattatīti upasamasukhaṃ. Maggasambodhatthāya saṃvattatīti sambodhisukhaṃ. Nikāmalābhīti kāmalābhī icchitalābhī. Akicchalābhīti adukkhalābhī. Akasiralābhīti vipulalābhī.
“暂时的”(sāmāyika)是指在入定或安止的那段时间里从烦恼中解脱出来。“可意的”(kanta)即可喜、可爱。“心解脱”(cetovimutti)是指色界或无色界的心解脱。即如所说:“四禅那与四无色定,是暂时的解脱。”(《无碍解道》1.213)“非暂时的”(asāmāyika)并非依某个时段从烦恼中解脱,而是指究竟解脱,即出世间。也如所说:“四圣道与四沙门果,是非暂时的解脱。”“不动”(akuppa)即不被烦恼所动摇。显示巴利原文
Sāmāyikanti appitappitasamaye kilesehi vimuttaṃ. Kantanti manāpaṃ. Cetovimuttinti rūpārūpāvacaracittavimuttiṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘cattāri ca jhānāni catasso ca arūpasamāpattiyo, ayaṃ sāmāyiko vimokkho’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.213). Asāmāyikanti na samayavasena kilesehi vimuttaṃ, atha kho accantavimuttaṃ lokuttaraṃ vuttaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘cattāro ca ariyamaggā cattāri ca sāmaññaphalāni, ayaṃ asāmāyiko vimokkho’’ti. Akuppanti kilesehi akopetabbaṃ.
至此,说明了什么呢?乐于聚会的比丘被群体纽带系缚,既不能产生世间功德,也不能产生出世间功德;唯有驱散群体、乐于独处者方能。正如毗婆尸菩萨被八万四千出家众围绕,游行了七年,却未能证得一切知智;驱散群体后,于七日中独自精进,登上菩提座,证得一切知智。我们的菩萨与五比丘共同游行六年,未能证得一切知智;当他们离去后,独自精进,登上菩提座,方证得一切知智。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā kiṃ kathitaṃ hoti? Saṅgaṇikārāmo bhikkhu gaṇabandhanabaddho neva lokiyaguṇaṃ, na ca lokuttaraguṇaṃ nibbattetuṃ sakkoti, gaṇaṃ vinodetvā pana ekābhirato sakkoti. Tathā hi vipassī bodhisatto caturāsītiyā pabbajitasahassehi parivuto satta vassāni vicaranto sabbaññuguṇaṃ nibbattetuṃ nāsakkhi, gaṇaṃ vinodetvā sattadivase ekībhāvābhirato bodhimaṇḍaṃ āruyha sabbaññuguṇaṃ nibbattesi. Amhākaṃ bodhisatto pañcavaggiyehi saddhiṃ chabbassāni vicaranto sabbaññuguṇaṃ nibbattetuṃ nāsakkhi, tesu pakkantesu ekībhāvābhirato bodhimaṇḍaṃ āruyha sabbaññuguṇaṃ nibbattesi.
如此开示了乐于聚会者不能证得功德之后,现在为了开示其中的过患,世尊说:“阿难,我不见……”等。其中,“色”指身体。“若对某种色染著”是说如果有人因贪欲而对某种色染著。“不会生起”是指:若对某种色染著,那些变异不会生起——这样的色我不见。然而,像舍利弗与目犍连成为十力声闻的这种变异,就如散闍耶因失去他们而生起烦恼;又如优波离居士的变异,令尼乾陀若提子感到痛苦;再如《爱生经》中长者等因亲人的变异而生起忧愁悲伤。这些由染著所带来的变异,是一定会发生的。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saṅgaṇikārāmassa guṇādhigamābhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni dosuppattiṃ dassento nāhaṃ ānandātiādimāha. Tattha rūpanti sarīraṃ. Yattha rattassāti yasmiṃ rūpe rāgavasena rattassa. Na uppajjeyyunti yasmiṃ rūpe rattassa na uppajjeyyuṃ, taṃ rūpaṃ na samanupassāmi, atha kho sāriputtamoggallānānaṃ dasabalasāvakattupagamanasaṅkhātena aññathābhāvena sañcayassa viya, upāligahapatino aññathābhāvena nāṭaputtassa viya, piyajātikasutte seṭṭhiādīnaṃ viya ca uppajjantiyeva.
187 “然而,阿难,这是……”这句话与上下文的关联是怎样的呢?如果有愚痴的新学比丘这样说:“正自觉者就像走进田地的母牛一样,把我们赶离人群,鼓励我们独处,自己却由国王、大臣等围绕着安住。”为了彻底堵住这种说法的机会,也为了显示“即使坐在遍满整个轮围世界的群众当中,如来也是独自安住”,才开始这段开示。其中,“一切相”指色等诸行的相。“内”指所缘境的内在。“空”指空果等至。“于彼”是处格用作受格,指那个心。而“复于彼”指安住在那群众之中。“趣向远离”就是趣向涅槃。“离去”就是从烦恼住处法离去、出离、脱离。“与劝导出离语相属”就是与“你们去吧”这样劝导出离的话语相关联。显示巴利原文
187.Ayaṃkho panānandāti ko anusandhi? Sace hi koci dubbuddhī navapabbajito vadeyya – ‘‘sammāsambuddho khettaṃ paviṭṭhā gāviyo viya amheyeva gaṇato nīharati, ekībhāve niyojeti, sayaṃ pana rājarājamahāmattādīhi parivuto viharatī’’ti, tassa vacanokāsupacchedanatthaṃ – ‘‘cakkavāḷapariyantāya parisāya majjhe nisinnopi tathāgato ekakovā’’ti dassetuṃ imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha sabbanimittānanti rūpādīnaṃ saṅkhanimittānaṃ. Ajjhattanti visayajjhattaṃ. Suññatanti suññataphalasamāpattiṃ. Tatra ceti upayogatthe bhummaṃ, taṃ ceti vuttaṃ hoti. Puna tatrāti tasmiṃ parisamajjhe ṭhito. Vivekaninnenāti nibbānaninnena. Byantībhūtenāti āsavaṭṭhānīyadhammehi vigatantena nissaṭena visaṃyuttena. Uyyojanikapaṭisaṃyuttanti gacchatha tumheti evaṃ uyyojanikena vacanena paṭisaṃyuttaṃ.
世尊是在什么时间这样说的呢?是在午后处理事务的时分,或者在初夜处理事务的时分。世尊午后在香室中以狮子卧的姿势休息,起身后入果等至安坐。那时,大众为了听法而聚集。世尊知道适当时机后,从香室出来,登上最胜的佛座,说法之后,犹如适时煮制药油而不失其时一样,以趣向远离之心劝离大众。在初夜时分,世尊也会以“夜已深沉,婆私吒!现在你们应当知道是时候了”来劝离。因为诸佛从证得菩提以来,即使是两种五识也都趣向涅槃。因此,“所以,阿难”的意思是:因为空住是寂静、殊胜的,所以这样说。显示巴利原文
Kāya pana velāya bhagavā evaṃ katheti? Pacchābhattakiccavelāya, vā purimayāmakiccavelāya vā. Bhagavā hi pacchābhatte gandhakuṭiyaṃ sīhaseyyaṃ kappetvā vuṭṭhāya phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā nisīdati. Tasmiṃ samaye dhammassavanatthāya parisā sannipatanti. Atha bhagavā kālaṃ viditvā gandhakuṭito nikkhamitvā buddhāsanavaragato dhammaṃ desetvā bhesajjatelapākaṃ gaṇhanto viya kālaṃ anatikkamitvā vivekaninnena cittena parisaṃ uyyojeti . Purimayāmepi ‘‘abhikkantā kho vāseṭṭhā ratti, yassa dāni kālaṃ maññathā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.299) evaṃ uyyojeti . Buddhānañhi bodhipattito paṭṭhāya dve pañcaviññāṇānipi nibbānaninnāneva. Tasmātihānandāti yasmā suññatāvihāro santo paṇīto, tasmā.
188 “Ajjhattameva”指的就是所缘的内在。“Ajjhattaṃ suññataṃ”此处指自身内在,意为依止于自己的五蕴。“正知”,是指由于觉知自己对业处是否保持正知而成为正知。“外”,是指依止于他人的五蕴。“内与外”,是指时而向内、时而向外。“不动”,是指怀着“我将成为俱分解脱者”的意愿,而作意于无色定。显示巴利原文
188.Ajjhattamevāti gocarajjhattameva. Ajjhattaṃ suññatanti idha niyakajjhattaṃ, attano pañcasu khandhesu nissitanti attho. Sampajāno hotīti kammaṭṭhānassa asampajjanabhāvajānanena sampajāno. Bahiddhāti parassa pañcasu khandhesu. Ajjhattabahiddhāti kālena ajjhattaṃ kālena bahiddhā . Āneñjanti ubhatobhāgavimutto bhavissāmāti āneñjaṃ arūpasamāpattiṃ manasi karoti.
“就在那个前面的”(tasmiṃyeva purimasmiṃ)是就基础禅那而说。若有人从尚未娴熟的基础禅那出定,向内作意于空时,心无法跃入。于是他想:“在他人相续中又如何呢?”便向外作意,心仍无法跃入。继而又想:“有时在自己的相续中,有时在他人的相续中,又会如何?”便作意于内与外,心依然无法跃入。随后,他希望成为俱分解脱者,心想:“在无色定中又如何呢?”便作意于不动,心还是无法跃入。至此,为了说明:当“我的心不跃入”时,不应以松懈的精进,如同侍者那般随他人之后行事;恰恰相反,应当只是再再地善作意于基础禅那。犹如伐木者,斧头钝了砍不下时,便再将它磨利,继续砍截,这把斧头就能斩断应断之处;同样地,于业处上的作意也会运转起来。于是说了“就在那个……”等语。接着,为了显示如此修行的人,无论作意什么,于一切所缘上皆能成就,而说“跃入”(pakkhandati)。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃyeva purimasminti pādakajjhānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Apaguṇapādakajjhānato vuṭṭhitassa hi ajjhattaṃ suññataṃ manasikaroto tattha cittaṃ na pakkhandati. Tato ‘‘parassa santāne nu kho katha’’nti bahiddhā manasi karoti, tatthapi na pakkhandati. Tato – ‘‘kālena attano santāne, kālena parassa santāne nu kho katha’’nti ajjhattabahiddhā manasi karoti, tatthapi na pakkhandati. Tato ubhatobhāgavimutto hotukāmo ‘‘arūpasamāpattiyaṃ nu kho katha’’nti āneñjaṃ manasi karoti, tatthapi na pakkhandati. Idāni – ‘‘na me cittaṃ pakkhandatīti vissaṭṭhavīriyena upaṭṭhākādīnaṃ pacchato na caritabbaṃ, pādakajjhānameva pana sādhukaṃ punappunaṃ manasikātabbaṃ. Evamassa rukkhe chindato pharasumhi avahante puna nisitaṃ kāretvā chindantassa chijjesu pharasu viya kammaṭṭhāne manasikāro vahatī’’ti dassetuṃ tasmiṃyevātiādimāha. Idānissa evaṃ paṭipannassa yaṃ yaṃ manasi karoti, tattha tattha manasikāro sampajjatīti dassento pakkhandatīti āha.
189 “以此住”(iminā vihārena),就是以此止观之住。“如是,于此处正知”(itiha tattha sampajāno),意思是:即便在经行时,当业处成就之际,由于了知“我的业处正在成就”而成为正知。“躺卧”(sayatī),即是躺下。在此,经行一段时间后,了知“我现在能经行这么久”,在不舍弃威仪的情况下,应当站立。此理适用于一切场合。“将不说”(na kathessāmī),意思是:由于了知“于此处,我将不说如是言语”,而在彼时成为正知而行者。显示巴利原文
189.Iminā vihārenāti iminā samathavipassanāvihārena. Itiha tattha sampajānoti iti caṅkamantopi tasmiṃ kammaṭṭhāne sampajjamāne ‘‘sampajjati me kammaṭṭhāna’’nti jānanena sampajāno hoti. Sayatīti nipajjati. Ettha kañci kālaṃ caṅkamitvā – ‘‘idāni ettakaṃ kālaṃ caṅkamituṃ sakkhissāmī’’ti ñatvā iriyāpathaṃ ahāpetvā ṭhātabbaṃ. Esa nayo sabbavāresu . Na kathessāmīti, itiha tatthāti evaṃ na kathessāmīti jānanena tattha sampajānakārī hoti.
又在第二个场合,因了知“我将说如此之语”而成为正知而行者。这位比丘的止观尚属稚弱,为守护它们——显示巴利原文
Puna dutiyavāre evarūpiṃ kathaṃ kathessāmīti jānanena sampajānakārī hoti, imassa bhikkhuno samathavipassanā taruṇāva, tāsaṃ anurakkhaṇatthaṃ –
住处、行处、谈论、人、食物、时节、威仪——此七种适宜者应当遵行。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Āvāso gocaro bhassaṃ, puggalo atha bhojanaṃ;
时节与威仪,这些七种适宜者应当依行。为说明这些而作此说。在关于寻的章节中,应以无寻与有寻的辨别来理解正知。显示巴利原文
Utu iriyāpatho ceva, sappāyo sevitabbako’’ti.
如此,在通过断除寻而说明了二种道之后,现在为了指示第三道的观,而说“阿难,有这五种欲功德”等。「处」:指依于那些欲功德之中,某个能生烦恼的因缘。「现行」:指由现行而未被断除的烦恼。「如是存在」:即正在那样存在的状态。「正知」:指由了知业处尚未成就而成为正知。于第二转中,「如是存在时此」:即当如是存在时,此。「正知」:指由了知业处已成就而成为正知。因为这位比丘观察:“我对五种欲功德之欲贪是否已被断除?”了知那未被破坏的状态后,便策励精进,以不来道断除它。随后,道后无间即证得果;从果出起再观察时,便了知已被破坏的状态。由如此了知,所以说“成为正知”。显示巴利原文
Satta sappāyāni icchitabbāni. Tesaṃ dassanatthamidaṃ vuttaṃ. Vitakkavāresu avitakkanassa ca vitakkanassa ca jānanena sampajānatā veditabbā.
190 190. 如此,在借由断除寻而说明了二种道之后,现在为了指示第三道的观,而说“阿难,有这样的五种欲功德”等。「处」:指于那些欲功德中,某个能生烦恼的因缘。「现行」:指由现行而未被断除的烦恼。「如是存在」:即如是实存。「正知」:指由了知业处未成就而成为正知。于下文中,「如是存在的此」:即如是存在的此。「正知」:指由了知业处已成就而成为正知。因为此人检视:“我对五种欲功德的欲贪是否已被断除?”知未被断除后,便引发精进,以不来道根除它。此后是道果,从果出起而再检视时,了知已被断除的状态。由他的了知,故说“为正知”。显示巴利原文
190. Iti vitakkapahānena dve magge kathetvā idāni tatiyamaggassa vipassanaṃ ācikkhanto pañca kho ime, ānanda, kāmaguṇātiādimāha. Āyataneti tesuyeva kāmaguṇesu kismiñcideva kilesuppattikāraṇe. Samudācāroti samudācaraṇato appahīnakileso. Evaṃsantanti evaṃ vijjamānameva. Sampajānoti kammaṭṭhānassa asampattijānanena sampajāno. Dutiyavāre evaṃ santametanti evaṃ sante etaṃ. Sampajānoti kammaṭṭhānasampattijānanena sampajāno. Ayañhi ‘‘pahīno nu kho me pañcasu kāmaguṇesu chandarāgo no’’ti paccavekkhamāno apahīnabhāvaṃ ñatvā vīriyaṃ paggahetvā taṃ anāgāmimaggena samugghāṭeti, tato maggānantaraṃ phalaṃ, phalato vuṭṭhāya paccavekkhamāno pahīnabhāvaṃ jānāti, tassa jānanena ‘‘sampajāno hotī’’ti vuttaṃ.
191 191. 现在,为了指示阿拉汉道的观,而说“阿难,有这样的五取蕴”等。其中,「彼被断除」:指于色上,“我是”之慢、“我是”之欲、“我是”之随眠被断除。于受等诸蕴上,也是如此。「正知」可依如前所述的方式而了知。显示巴利原文
191. Idāni arahattamaggassa vipassanaṃ ācikkhanto pañca kho ime, ānanda, upādānakkhandhātiādimāha. Tattha so pahīyatīti rūpe asmīti māno asmīti chando asmīti anusayo pahīyati. Tathā vedanādīsu sampajānatā vuttanāyeneva veditabbā.
“阿难,这些法”,是指前面所说的止观、道果诸法。“善所生”:即从善而生。因为,善既是善,也是善所生,例如:初禅是善,第二禅既是善也是善所生……乃至……无所有处是善,非想非非想处既是善也是善所生;非想非非想处是善,入流道既是善也是善所生……乃至……阿那含道是善,阿拉汉道既是善也是善所生。同样地,初禅是善,与之相应的诸法既是善也是善所生……乃至……阿拉汉道是善,与之相应的诸法既是善也是善所生。显示巴利原文
Ime kho te, ānanda, dhammāti heṭṭhā kathite samathavipassanāmaggaphaladhamme sandhāyāha. Kusalāyatikāti kusalato āgatā. Kusalā hi kusalāpi honti kusalāyatikāpi, seyyathidaṃ, paṭhamajjhānaṃ kusalaṃ, dutiyajjhānaṃ kusalañceva kusalāyatikañca…pe… ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ kusalaṃ, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ kusalañceva kusalāyatikañca, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ kusalaṃ, sotāpattimaggo kusalo ceva kusalāyatiko ca…pe… anāgāmimaggo kusalo, arahattamaggo kusalo ceva kusalāyatiko ca. Tathā paṭhamajjhānaṃ kusalaṃ, taṃsampayuttakā dhammā kusalā ceva kusalāyatikā ca…pe… arahattamaggo kusalo, taṃsampayuttakā dhammā kusalā ceva kusalāyatikā ca.
“圣”:即无烦恼、清净。“出世间的”:于世间中超越、殊胜。“未被魔罗进入”:即不被恶者魔罗进入。因为,当比丘安住于以观为近因的八等至后而静坐时,魔罗看不见他的心,不能了知“他正依此所缘而转”。因此说“未被进入”。显示巴利原文
Ariyāti nikkilesā visuddhā. Lokuttarāti loke uttarā visiṭṭhā. Anavakkantāpāpimatāti pāpimantena mārena anokkantā. Vipassanāpādakā aṭṭha samāpattiyo appetvā nisinnassa hi bhikkhuno cittaṃ māro na passati, ‘‘idaṃ nāma ārammaṇaṃ nissāya saṃvattatī’’ti jātituṃ na sakkoti. Tasmā ‘‘anavakkantā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“你对此怎么想?”——这句为什么这么说呢?是为了显示即使只是随从也有一种功德,所以这么说。“应随从”:即跟随、侍奉。显示巴利原文
Taṃ kiṃ maññasīti idaṃ kasmā āha? Gaṇepi eko ānisaṃso atthi, taṃ dassetuṃ idamāha. Anubandhitunti anugacchituṃ paricarituṃ.
“阿难,不”这一句:在这里,虽然世尊曾将多闻者比喻为具足五种武器的战士,如说:“诸比丘,多闻的圣弟子断除不善、修习善法,断除有罪过、修习无罪过,守护清净的自我”(《增支部》7.67),然而,有人虽掌握了所闻的教法,却不修习与之相应的随顺行道,那教法便不成其为他的武器;唯有修习者,教法才成为他的武器。因此,为了表明不应为那个目的而追随,世尊才说:“阿难,不。”显示巴利原文
Na kho, ānandāti ettha kiñcāpi bhagavatā – ‘‘sutāvudho, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako akusalaṃ pajahati, kusalaṃ bhāveti, sāvajjaṃ pajahati, anavajjaṃ bhāveti, suddhaṃ attānaṃ pariharatī’’ti (a. ni. 7.67) bahussuto pañcāvudhasampanno yodho viya kato. Yasmā pana so sutapariyattiṃ uggahetvāpi tadanucchavikaṃ anulomapaṭipadaṃ na paṭipajjati, na tassa taṃ āvudhaṃ hoti. Yo paṭipajjati, tasseva hoti. Tasmā etadatthaṃ anubandhituṃ nārahatīti dassento na kho, ānandāti āha.
现在,为了说明为何种目的而应当追随,便说了“凡此”等语。如此,在这部经中,十种论事于三处出现。“我将作这样的谈论”是依适当与不适当而出现的,“即所谓经、应颂”在那里是依所闻教法而出现,在此处则是依圆满具足而出现。因此,在这部经中讲述十种论事的人,应立足于这个立场而说。显示巴利原文
Idāni yadatthaṃ anubandhitabbo, taṃ dassetuṃ yā ca khotiādimāha. Iti imasmiṃ sutte tīsu ṭhānesu dasa kathāvatthūni āgatāni. ‘‘Iti evarūpaṃ kathaṃ kathessāmī’’ti sappāyāsappāyavasena āgatāni, ‘‘yadidaṃ suttaṃ geyya’’nti ettha sutapariyattivasena āgatāni, imasmiṃ ṭhāne paripūraṇavasena āgatāni. Tasmā imasmiṃ sutte dasa kathāvatthūni kathentena imasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhatvā kathetabbāni.
现在,因为有人虽然独自居住,也不能成就利益,所以针对这一点,为了显示独处的过患,世尊才说:“阿难,若如是存在时……”等等。在这里,“若如是存在时”(evaṃ sante),就是指这种独处的状态存在时。显示巴利原文
Idāni yasmā ekaccassa ekakassa viharatopi attho na sampajjati, tasmā taṃ sandhāya ekībhāve ādīnavaṃ dassento evaṃ sante kho, ānandātiādimāha. Tattha evaṃ santeti evaṃ ekībhāve sante.
193 师(Satthā):这里指外道的导师。“随转”(Anvāvattanti):是跟随、趋近的意思。“渴望迷恋”(Mucchaṃ kāmayatī):意思是希求并生起令人沉迷的渴爱。“因师之灾患”(Ācariyūpaddavenāti):是指由于内在生起的烦恼灾患,因此称为师之灾患。对于其他的灾患,也是同理。“他们杀害了他”(Avadhiṃsu naṃ):即他们杀死了他。以此说明功德的消亡。显示巴利原文
193.Satthāti bāhirako titthakarasatthā. Anvāvattantīti anuāvattanti upasaṅkamanti. Mucchaṃ kāmayatīti mucchanataṇhaṃ pattheti, pavattetīti attho. Ācariyūpaddavenāti abbhantare uppannena kilesūpaddavena ācariyassupaddavo. Sesupaddavesupi eseva nayo. Avadhiṃsu nanti mārayiṃsu naṃ. Etena hi guṇamaraṇaṃ kathitaṃ.
为堕落(Vinipātāyāti):即彻底地坠落。然而,为什么唯独梵行灾患被说成“苦报更重、剧报更重,并能导致堕落”呢?因为外道出家所得的利益微薄,其中没有重大的功德可证得,仅有些许八等至和五神通而已。就如同从驴背上跌下来,并无大苦,只是身体沾了些尘土;同样地,在外道教法中,仅是从世间功德层面退失,因此前面那两种灾患未被如此说。可是,在佛陀教法中出家则有巨大的利益,其中有重大的功德可证得:四道、四果、涅槃。就如出身高贵的刹帝利青年,骑着上好的象背巡游城市时,若从象背上跌落,会遭受极大的痛苦;同样,从教法中退堕的人,会从九种出世间功德中退失。因此,这梵行灾患才被这样说。显示巴利原文
Vinipātāyāti suṭṭhu nipatanāya. Kasmā pana brahmacārupaddavova – ‘‘dukkhavipākataro ca kaṭukavipākataro ca vinipātāya ca saṃvattatī’’ti vuttoti. Bāhirapabbajjā hi appalābhā, tattha mahanto nibbattetabbaguṇo natthi, aṭṭhasamāpattipañcābhiññāmattakameva hoti. Iti yathā gadrabhapiṭṭhito patitassa mahantaṃ dukkhaṃ na hoti, sarīrassa paṃsumakkhanamattameva hoti, evaṃ bāhirasamaye lokiyaguṇamattatova parihāyati, tena purimaṃ upaddavadvayaṃ na evaṃ vuttaṃ. Sāsane pana pabbajjā mahālābhā, tattha cattāro maggā cattāri phalāni nibbānanti mahantā adhigantabbaguṇā. Iti yathā ubhato sujāto khattiyakumāro hatthikkhandhavaragato nagaraṃ anusañcaranto hatthikkhandhato patito mahādukkhaṃ nigacchati, evaṃ sāsanato parihāyamāno navahi lokuttaraguṇehi parihāyati. Tenāyaṃ brahmacārupaddavo evaṃ vutto.
196 所以(Tasmā):因为与其余的灾患相比,梵行灾患的苦报更为深重;或者说,因为偏离朋友之道,长夜将带来无益与苦,而奉行朋友之道则带来利益,因此这么说。故此,下面的义理与上面的义理都应如此相互结合来理解。“具足友道之状态”(Mittavatāya):即依朋友之道而行。“具足敌道之状态”(Sapattavatāya):即依怨敌之道而行。显示巴利原文
196.Tasmāti yasmā sesupaddavehi brahmacārupaddavo dukkhavipākataro, yasmā vā sapattapaṭipattiṃ vītikkamanto dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattati, mittapaṭipatti hitāya, tasmā. Evaṃ uparimenapi heṭṭhimenapi atthena yojetabbaṃ. Mittavatāyāti mittapaṭipattiyā. Sapattavatāyāti verapaṭipattiyā.
“及偏离了导师的教法”(Vokkammaca satthusāsanāti):即使是故意地,哪怕仅违犯了恶作或恶语,也称为“偏离而行”。唯有完全不违犯这些,才称为“未偏离而行”。显示巴利原文
Vokkammaca satthusāsanāti dukkaṭadubbhāsitamattampi hi sañcicca vītikkamanto vokkamma vattati nāma. Tadeva avītikkamanto na vokkamma vattati nāma.
“阿难,我将不会对你们那样着力”(Na vo ahaṃ, ānanda, tathā parakkamissāmīti):我不会以那样的方式对待你们。“于未烧制的”(Āmake):指未烧制过的。“于未烧制的器皿上”(Āmakamatteti):指在未烧制、尚不坚固的器皿上。就像陶匠对待未烧制、尚不坚固的器皿时,会用双手轻轻捧住,心想“别让它碎了”。所以,正如陶匠那样对待它们,我并不会那样对待你们。“呵责又呵责之后”(Niggayha niggayhāti):意思是教导一次后并不就此沉默,而是反复呵责之后,我会一再地教导、训诫。“淘汰又淘汰之后”(Pavayha pavayhāti):意思是在淘汰有过失者的过程中,一再地淘汰。就像陶匠在对待已烧制的器皿时,会把破裂的、有裂纹的、破旧的淘汰掉、搁置一旁,只反复敲打、只取用那些烧得极好的;同样,我也会一再淘汰,而后一再地教导、训诫。“凡是有坚实核心者,他将安住”(Yosāro so ṭhassatīti):在我这样教导的你们之中,凡是有道果坚实核心者,他将安住。显示巴利原文
Na vo ahaṃ, ānanda, tathā parakkamissāmīti ahaṃ tumhesu tathā na paṭipajjissāmi. Āmaketi apakke. Āmakamatteti āmake nātisukkhe bhājane. Kumbhakāro hi āmakaṃ nātisukkhaṃ apakkaṃ ubhohi hatthehi saṇhikaṃ gaṇhāti ‘‘mā bhijjatū’’ti. Iti yathā kumbhakāro tattha paṭipajjati, nāhaṃ tumhesu tathā paṭipajjissāmi. Niggayha niggayhāti sakiṃ ovaditvā tuṇhī na bhavissāmi, niggaṇhitvā niggaṇhitvā punappunaṃ ovadissāmi anusāsissāmi. Pavayha pavayhāti dose pavāhetvā pavāhetvā. Yathā pakkabhājanesu kumbhakāro bhinnachinnajajjarāni pavāhetvā ekato katvā supakkāneva ākoṭetvā ākoṭetvā gaṇhāti, evameva ahampi pavāhetvā pavāhetvā punappunaṃ ovadissāmi anusāsissāmi. Yosāro so ṭhassatīti evaṃ vo mayā ovadiyamānānaṃ yo maggaphalasāro, so ṭhassati. Apica lokiyaguṇāpi idha sārotveva adhippetā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
三、《希有未曾有法经》的注释显示巴利原文
3. Acchariyaabbhutasuttavaṇṇanā
197 “如是我闻”(Evaṃme sutaṃ),就是指这部《希有未曾有法经》。其中,“于此处”(yattha hi nāma)是表示稀有意味的小品词,整句意思相当于“那位名为如来的……”。“已断除戏论”:这里的戏论是指渴爱、慢、见这三种烦恼。“已断轮回之轮辐”:这里轮辐是指善与不善的业轮转。“已遍尽轮转者”是它的同义词。“已超越一切苦者”:意思是超越了由一切异熟轮转所摄的一切苦。“将随念”(Anussarissatīti):这是随顺“于(何处)”小品词的用法而用了未来时态,但此处意义应按过去时理解,因为世尊是过去随念诸佛,并非现在正要随念。“如是生者”:指毗婆尸佛等为刹帝利种姓,拘楼孙佛等为婆罗门种姓。“如是族姓者”:指毗婆尸佛等为憍陈如族姓,拘楼孙佛等为迦叶族姓。“如是戒者”:通过世间与出世间的戒,成为具足如是戒德者。“如是法者”:此处特指与定相应的种种支分法,意思是通过世间与出世间……显示巴利原文
197.Evaṃme sutanti acchariyaabbhutasuttaṃ. Tattha yatra hi nāmāti acchariyatthe nipāto. Yo nāma tathāgatoti attho. Chinnapapañceti ettha papañcā nāma taṇhā māno diṭṭhīti ime tayo kilesā. Chinnavaṭumeti ettha vaṭumanti kusalākusalakammavaṭṭaṃ vuccati. Pariyādinnavaṭṭeti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Sabbadukkhavītivatteti sabbaṃ vipākavaṭṭasaṅkhātaṃ dukkhaṃ vītivatte. Anussarissatīti idaṃ yatrāti nipātavasena anāgatavacanaṃ, attho panettha atītavasena veditabbo. Bhagavā hi te buddhe anussari, na idāni anussarissati. Evaṃjaccāti vipassīādayo khattiyajaccā, kakusandhādayo brāhmaṇajaccāti. Evaṃgottāti vipassīādayo koṇḍaññagottā, kakusandhādayo kassapagottāti. Evaṃsīlāti lokiyalokuttarasīlena evaṃsīlā. Evaṃdhammāti ettha samādhipakkhā dhammā adhippetā . Lokiyalokuttarena samādhinā evaṃsamādhinoti attho. Evaṃpaññāti lokiyalokuttarapaññāya evaṃpaññā. Evaṃvihārīti ettha pana heṭṭhā samādhipakkhānaṃ dhammānaṃ gahitattā vihāro gahitova, puna kasmā gahitameva gaṇhātīti ce, na idaṃ gahitameva. Idañhi nirodhasamāpattidīpanatthaṃ, tasmā evaṃnirodhasamāpattivihārīti ayamettha attho.
“如是解脱者”一句,包含五种解脱:镇伏解脱、彼分解脱、正断解脱、止息解脱与出离解脱。此中,八等至于其所镇伏的盖等烦恼已得解脱,故称镇伏解脱。无常随观等七随观,因各以对治舍断常想等而得解脱,故称彼分解脱。四圣道因彻底断除烦恼,故称正断解脱。四沙门果于圣道力止息烦恼之当下生起,故称止息解脱。涅槃因出离、远离一切烦恼,安住于不可及之处,故称出离解脱。因此,此处的“如是解脱者”,应依此五种解脱来理解其义。显示巴利原文
Evaṃvimuttāti ettha vikkhambhanavimutti tadaṅgavimutti samucchedavimutti paṭippassaddhivimutti nissaraṇavimuttīti pañcavidhā vimuttiyo. Tattha aṭṭha samāpattiyo sayaṃ vikkhambhitehi nīvaraṇādīhi vimuttattā vikkhambhanavimuttīti saṅkhaṃ gacchanti. Aniccānupassanādikā satta anupassanā sayaṃ tassa tassa paccanīkaṅgavasena paricattāhi niccasaññādīhi vimuttattā tadaṅgavimuttīti saṅkhaṃ gacchanti. Cattāro ariyamaggā sayaṃ samucchinnehi kilesehi vimuttattā samucchedavimuttīti saṅkhaṃ gacchanti. Cattāri sāmaññaphalāni maggānubhāvena kilesānaṃ paṭippassaddhante uppannattā paṭippassaddhivimuttīti saṅkhaṃ gacchanti. Nibbānaṃ sabbakilesehi nissaṭattā apagatattā dūre ṭhitattā nissaraṇavimuttīti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ. Iti imāsaṃ pañcannaṃ vimuttīnaṃ vasena evaṃvimuttāti evamettha attho veditabbo.
199 “是故,阿难”,意思是:既然你说“如来是稀有的”,那么就让更多如来的稀有、未曾有法呈现在你面前吧。“具念正知”一句,有两种正知:人界中的正知和天界中的正知。其中,在《须大拏本生》中,菩萨将两个儿子送给那位婆罗门,次日又将妻子送给那位婆罗门——那位婆罗门其实是帝释天所化。帝释天心生欢喜,赐予他八个愿望。当他纳受这些愿望时,便说了下面的偈颂:“我若从此得解脱,愿为升天殊胜者。”显示巴利原文
199.Tasmātihāti yasmā tvaṃ ‘‘tathāgatā acchariyā’’ti vadasi, tasmā taṃ bhiyyoso mattāya paṭibhantu tathāgatassa acchariyā abbhutadhammāti. Sato sampajānoti ettha dvesampajaññāni manussaloke devaloke ca. Tattha vessantarajātake brāhmaṇassa dve putte datvā punadivase sakkassa deviṃ datvā sakkena pasīditvā dinne aṭṭha vare gaṇhanto –
「当我从此解脱时,愿成为前往天界的殊胜智者;」
愿我不复退转,此是我所求的第八个愿。(《本生》2.22.2300)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ito vimuccamānāhaṃ, saggagāmī visesagū; Anivattī tato assaṃ, aṭṭhametaṃ varaṃ vare’’ti. (jā. 2.22.2300) –
如此,他发愿:“愿我结生于兜率天。”从那时起,他便了知“我将出生于兜率天”,此是居于人间时的正知。而他自须大拏之身命终之后,又复结生于兜率天,了知“我已出生”,此是居于天界时的正知。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ tusitabhavane me paṭisandhi hotūti varaṃ aggahesi, tato paṭṭhāya tusitabhavane uppajjissāmīti jānāti, idaṃ manussaloke sampajaññaṃ. Vessantarattabhāvato pana cuto puna tusitabhavane nibbattitvā nibbattosmīti aññāsi, idaṃ devaloke sampajaññaṃ.
那么,其余的天神难道不知道吗?并非不知。只是那些天神是在看见了园林、天宫与如意树之后,又被天伎乐的音乐声唤醒,经他人提醒——“贤友,这便是天界,您已投生于此”——方才知晓。菩萨在第一速行心时尚不了知,从第二速行心起便了知。由此,他拥有了不与其余天神共通的知见。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ pana sesadevatā na jānantīti? No na jānanti. Tā pana uyyānavimānakapparukkhe oloketvā devanāṭakehi tūriyasaddena pabodhitā ‘‘mārisa ayaṃ devaloko tumhe idha nibbattā’’ti sāritā jānanti. Bodhisatto paṭhamajavanavāre na jānāti, dutiyajavanato paṭṭhāya jānāti. Iccassa aññehi asādhāraṇajānanaṃ hoti.
「他站立」:虽然其余天神也知自己“我们已站住于此”,但当他们被六根门中极其可意的所缘所压倒时,便会忘失正念,甚至不知自己饮啖的状况,终因断段食而死。菩萨难道没有那样的所缘吗?并非没有。菩萨确实在十种事情上胜过其余天神,但他并不被所缘压倒,反而令所缘屈服而安住。因此经中说:“阿难,菩萨具念正知,在兜率天身中站立。”显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhāsīti ettha kiñcāpi aññepi devā tattha ṭhitā ṭhitamhāti jānanti, te pana chasu dvāresu balavatā iṭṭhārammaṇena abhibhuyyamānā satiṃ vissajjetvā attano bhuttapītabhāvampi ajānantā āhārūpacchedena kālaṃ karonti. Bodhisattassa kiṃ tathārūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ natthīti? No natthi. So hi sesadeve dasahi ṭhānehi adhiggaṇhāti, ārammaṇena pana attānaṃ maddituṃ na deti, taṃ ārammaṇaṃ abhibhavitvā tiṭṭhati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘sato sampajāno, ānanda, bodhisatto tusite kāye aṭṭhāsī’’ti.
200 「尽其寿量」:在其他有身中,难道他并非尽其寿量而住吗?是的,并非如此。因为在其他时候,若生于长寿的天界,便无法在那里圆满诸波罗蜜,于是他便闭上眼,作“决意死”而往生人间。这种舍命的方式是他人所没有的。而那时,他已没有未给的布施,没有未持的戒,一切波罗蜜都已圆满,所以他才安住彼处直至寿终。显示巴利原文
200.Yāvatāyukanti sesattabhāvesu kiṃ yāvatāyukaṃ na tiṭṭhattīti? Āma na tiṭṭhati. Aññadā hi dīghāyukadevaloke nibbatto tattha pāramiyo na sakkā pūretunti akkhīni nimīletvā adhimuttikālaṃkiriyaṃ nāma katvā manussaloke nibbattati . Ayaṃ kālaṅkiriyā aññesaṃ na hoti. Tadā pana adinnadānaṃ nāma natthi, arakkhitasīlaṃ nāma natthi, sabbapāramīnaṃ pūritattā yāvatāyukaṃ aṭṭhāsi.
如是,“具念正知,从兜率天身死后,入于母胎”是指:菩萨圆满一切波罗蜜后,当时便尽其寿量而住。而对于那些天神,当按人间的算法,七天后即将命终时,便有五种前相生起:花鬘枯萎,衣裳垢腻,腋下出汗,身色衰变,于自天座心生厌离。显示巴利原文
Sato sampajāno tusitā kāyā cavitvā mātukucchiṃ okkamatīti evaṃ tāva sabbapāramiyo pūretvā tadā bodhisatto yāvatāyukaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Devatānaṃ pana – ‘‘manussagaṇanāvasena idāni sattahi divasehi cuti bhavissatī’’ti pañca pubbanimittāni uppajjanti – mālā milāyanti, vatthāni kilissanti, kacchehi sedā muccanti, kāye dubbaṇṇiyaṃ okkamati, devo devāsane na saṇṭhāti.
其中,“花鬘”指投生结生时所佩戴的花环。据说,这些花环在五十七亿又六十万年中不曾枯萎,直至此时方始枯萎。衣服也是如此。在如此漫长的时间里,天人们既不觉得冷,也不觉得热,此时身上却一滴滴地渗出汗水;在如此漫长的时间里,他们身上从未显现秃发、白发等衰相,天女如同十六岁的少女,天子如同二十岁的青年,而临死之时,身体便显出疲惫之相;在如此漫长的时间里,他们在天界从未感到厌倦,而临死之时,却叹气、打呵欠,对自己的座位心生不喜。显示巴利原文
Tattha mālāti paṭisandhiggahaṇadivase piḷandhanamālā. Tā kira saṭṭhisatasahassādhikā sattapaṇṇāsa-vassakoṭiyo amilāyitvā tadā milāyanti. Vatthesupi eseva nayo. Ettakaṃ pana kālaṃ devānaṃ neva sītaṃ na uṇhaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ kāle sarīrato bindubinduvasena sedā muccanti. Ettakañca kālaṃ tesaṃ sarīre khaṇḍiccapāliccādivasena vivaṇṇatā na paññāyati, devadhītā soḷasavassuddesikā viya, devaputtā vīsativassuddesikā viya khāyanti. Maraṇakāle pana nesaṃ kilantarūpo attabhāvo hoti. Ettakañca nesaṃ kālaṃ devaloke ukkaṇṭhitā nāma natthi, maraṇakāle pana nissasanti vijambhanti, sake āsane nābhiramanti.
然而,这些前兆,正如在人间,唯有大福德之人——如国王、大臣等——才会出现流星陨落、地震、月食等征兆,并非人人可见;同样,这些相也只在大威德天人身上显现,并非所有天人皆现。又如,在人间,唯有占星师等方能知晓这些前兆,并非人人皆知;同样,这些相也并非所有天人都能知晓,唯有具智慧的天人才知道。其中,那些由微少善业而生天的天子,当这些相显现时,便恐惧地想:‘现在,谁知道我们将投生何处呢?’而那些大福德的天人则想:‘依我们所行的布施、所持的戒律、所修的梵行,我们必将享受上界天中的殊胜成就。’他们并不害怕。菩萨见到这些前兆,也毫无畏惧,心想:‘我将在此最后之身中成就佛陀。’随后,当这些相显现时,一万世界中的天人聚集而来,恳求道:‘尊者!您圆满十波罗蜜,并非为了希求帝释的成就、魔罗的成就、梵天的成就,也不是为了转轮圣王的成就,而是为了度脱世间,才希求佛果。尊者,如今正是您成佛之时!尊者,如今正是您成佛之时!’显示巴利原文
Imāni pana pubbanimittāni, yathā loke mahāpuññānaṃ rājarājamahāmattādīnaṃyeva ukkāpātabhūmicālacandaggāhādīni nimittāni paññāyanti, na sabbesaṃ, evameva mahesakkhānaṃ devatānaṃyeva paññāyanti, na sabbesaṃ. Yathā ca manussesu pubbanimittāni nakkhattapāṭhakādayova jānanti, na sabbe, evameva tānipi sabbe devā na jānanti, paṇḍitā eva pana jānanti. Tattha ye ca mandena kusalakammena nibbattā devaputtā, te tesu uppannesu – ‘‘idāni ko jānāti, kuhiṃ nibbattissāmā’’ti bhāyanti. Ye mahāpuññā, te – ‘‘amhehi dinnaṃ dānaṃ rakkhitaṃ sīlaṃ bhāvitaṃ bhāvanaṃ āgamma uparidevalokesu sampattiṃ anubhavissāmā’’ti na bhāyanti. Bodhisattopi tāni pubbanimittāni disvā ‘‘idāni anantare attabhāve buddho bhavissāmī’’ti na bhāyi. Athassa tesu nimittesu pātubhūtesu dasasahassacakkavāḷadevatā sannipatitvā – ‘‘mārisa tumhehi dasa pāramiyo pūrentehi na sakkasampattiṃ na mārabrahmacakkavattisampattiṃ patthentehi pūritā, lokanittharaṇatthāya pana buddhattaṃ patthayamānehi pūritā. So vo idāni kālo mārisa buddhattāya, samayo mārisa buddhattāyā’’ti yācanti.
那时,大士并未应允天人,而是先依时间、洲、处所、家族、生母及寿命限量这五方面,作所谓的五大观察。他首先观察时间:‘是应时,还是非应时?’其中,人寿超过十万年的时期,不算应时。何以故?因为那时的众生不见生、老、死,而诸佛说法必不离三相——若对他们宣说无常、苦、无我,他们会想:‘这是在说什么?’既不想听,也不肯信,因而不能生起现观;若无现观,教法便无法导向出离。因此,那并非应时。人寿短于百年的时期,也不算应时。何以故?因为那时的众生烦恼炽盛,对烦恼炽盛者给予教诫,教诫无法安立其心,就如同在水面上划出的线条,旋即消失。因此,那也并非应时。而人寿在十万年以下、百年以上的范围,才是应时。当时恰好是人寿百年之时,大士如此观察后,确知‘这是应生之时’,便确定了时间。显示巴利原文
Atha mahāsatto devatānaṃ paṭiññaṃ adatvāva kāladīpadesakulajanettiāyuparicchedavasena pañcamahāvilokanaṃ nāma vilokesi. Tattha ‘‘kālo nu kho, na kālo’’ti paṭhamaṃ kālaṃ vilokesi. Tattha vassasatasahassato uddhaṃ vaḍḍhitaāyukālo kālo nāma na hoti. Kasmā? Tadā hi sattānaṃ jātijarāmaraṇāni na paññāyanti, buddhānañca dhammadesanā nāma tilakkhaṇamuttā natthi, tesaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti kathentānaṃ ‘‘kiṃ nāmetaṃ kathentī’’ti neva sotuṃ na saddhātuṃ maññanti, tato abhisamayo na hoti, tasmiṃ asati aniyyānikaṃ sāsanaṃ hoti. Tasmā so akālo. Vassasatato ūnaāyukālopi kālo nāma na hoti. Kasmā? Tadā hi sattā ussannakilesā honti, ussannakilesānañca dinnovādo ovādaṭṭhāne na tiṭṭhati. Udake daṇḍarāji viya khippaṃ vigacchati. Tasmā sopi akālo. Satasahassato pana paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā vassasatato paṭṭhāya uddhaṃ āyukālo kālo nāma. Tadā ca vassasatakālo hoti. Atha mahāsatto ‘‘nibbattitabbakālo’’ti kālaṃ passi.
接着观察大洲:他观察了连同附属岛屿的四大洲后,了知“佛陀不生于其他三洲,唯生于赡部洲”,如此便确定了大洲。显示巴利原文
Tato dīpaṃ vilokento saparivāre cattāro dīpe oloketvā – ‘‘tīsu dīpesu buddhā na nibbattanti, jambudīpeyeva nibbattantī’’ti dīpaṃ passi.
接着观察地方:“赡部洲方圆一万由旬,佛陀究竟会出生在何处呢?”当他观察地方时,见到了中部地区。所谓中部地区,如律典中所说:“东方有一村落名为迦奢伽拉……”等等。其长度三百由旬,宽度二百五十由旬,周围九百由旬。在这片区域内,圆满四、八或十六个不可数劫及百千劫波罗蜜的人,能成为正自觉者;圆满两个不可数劫及百千劫波罗蜜的人,能成为独觉佛;圆满一个不可数劫及百千劫波罗蜜的人,能成为舍利弗、目犍连等大弟子;统御四大洲及二千小洲、拥有自在主权的转轮王也出现于此;其他大威德的刹帝利、婆罗门、居士豪门等也在此出现。而此处正好有迦毗罗卫城,我应当生在那里。”他这样作出了决定。显示巴利原文
Tato – ‘‘jambudīpo nāma mahā, dasayojanasahassaparimāṇo, katarasmiṃ nu kho padese buddhā nibbattantī’’ti desaṃ vilokento majjhimadesaṃ passi. Majjhimadeso nāma ‘‘puratthimāya disāya gajaṅgalaṃ nāma nigamo’’tiādinā nayena vinaye (mahāva. 259) vuttova. So pana āyāmato tīṇi yojanasatāni. Vitthārato aḍḍhatiyāni, parikkhepato navayojanasatānīti. Etasmiñhi padese cattāri aṭṭha soḷasa vā asaṅkhyeyyāni, kappasatasahassañca pāramiyo pūretvā sammāsambuddhā uppajjanti. Dve asaṅkhyeyyāni, kappasatasahassañca pāramiyo pūretvā paccekabuddhā uppajjanti, ekaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ, kappasatasahassañca pāramiyo pūretvā sāriputtamoggallānādayo mahāsāvakā uppajjanti, catunnaṃ mahādīpānaṃ dvisahassānaṃ parittadīpānañca issariyādhipaccakārakacakkavattirājāno uppajjanti, aññe ca mahesakkhā khattiyabrāhmaṇagahapatimahāsālā uppajjanti. Idañcettha kapilavatthu nāma nagaraṃ, tattha mayā nibbattitabbanti niṭṭhamagamāsi.
接着观察家族:“佛陀必定出生于世间公认的家族。如今刹帝利家族为世间所公认,我将投生那里,净饭王将成为我的父亲。”如此观察了家族。显示巴利原文
Tato kulaṃ vilokento – ‘‘buddhā nāma lokasammate kule nibbattanti, idāni ca khattiyakulaṃ lokasammataṃ, tattha nibbattissāmi, suddhodano nāma rājā me pitā bhavissatī’’ti kulaṃ passi.
接着,他观察母亲:‘佛陀之母不会轻浮放逸,也不会酗酒,她于百千劫中圆满波罗蜜,从出生时起便持守不破的五戒。这位名为摩诃摩耶的王后正是如此,她将成为我的母亲。那她的寿命还有多长呢?’当他作意之后,便看见:‘在十个月又七天之后(便将命终)。’显示巴利原文
Tato mātaraṃ vilokento – ‘‘buddhamātā nāma lolā surādhuttā na hoti, kappasatasahassaṃ pūritapāramī jātito paṭṭhāya akhaṇḍapañcasīlā hoti, ayañca mahāmāyā nāma devī edisā. Ayaṃ me mātā bhavissati. Kittakaṃ panassā āyū’’ti āvajjanto – ‘‘dasannaṃ māsānaṃ upari satta divasānī’’ti passi.
如此,完成这五大观察之后,为了摄受众天神,他说道:‘尊者们,我成佛的时机到了!’应允之后,便说:‘你们请回吧!’于是遣散了那些天神。他在兜率天神的围绕下,进入了兜率天城的欢喜园——在一切天界中,确实都有欢喜园。在那里,天神们围绕着他,忆念着他过去所造善业将引往的去处,并说道:‘从此处没后,愿你往生善趣!从此处没后,愿你往生善趣!’就在天神们如此忆念善业的周匝围绕中,他在园中游走时命终。显示巴利原文
Iti imaṃ pañcamahāvilokanaṃ viloketvā – ‘‘kālo me mārisā buddhabhāvāyā’’ti devatānaṃ saṅgahaṃ karonto paṭiññaṃ datvā ‘‘gacchatha tumhe’’ti tā devatā uyyojetvā tusitadevatāhi parivuto tusitapure nandanavanaṃ pāvisi. Sabbadevalokesu hi nandanavanaṃ atthiyeva. Tattha naṃ devatā – ‘‘ito cuto sugatiṃ gaccha, ito cuto sugatiṃ gacchā’’ti pubbekatakusalakammokāsaṃ sārayamānā vicaranti. So evaṃ devatāhi kusalaṃ sārayamānāhi parivuto tattha vicarantova cavi.
如是命终时,他了知‘我将死去’,却不了知死心。结生之后,同样不了知结生心,但却了知‘我在此处结了生’。然而有些长老说:‘所谓转向的方便是存在的,他会在第二或第三心刹那才了知。’三藏大希瓦长老则这样说:‘大士们的结生与其他人不同,他们的正念正知已经达到圆满。但由于不能以同一个心了知那个心,所以不了知死心。在死没的刹那,他了知“我将死去”;结生之后,不了知结生心,但了知“我在某处结了生”。那时,一万个世界为之震动。’就这样,菩萨具足正念、正知,入于母胎。在十九种结生心中,他先以类似慈心为前导,以与喜俱行、与智相应、无行的大善异熟心结生。然而大希瓦长老则说:‘是以与舍俱行的心结生的。’显示巴利原文
Evaṃ cuto cavāmīti pajānāti, cuticittaṃ na jānāti. Paṭisandhiṃ gahetvāpi paṭisandhicittaṃ na jānāti, imasmiṃ me ṭhāne paṭisandhi gahitāti evaṃ pana jānāti. Keci pana therā ‘‘āvajjanapariyāyo nāma laddhuṃ vaṭṭati, dutiyatatiyacittavāreyeva jānissatī’’ti vadanti. Tipiṭakamahāsīvatthero panāha – ‘‘mahāsattānaṃ paṭisandhi na aññesaṃ paṭisandhisadisā, koṭippattaṃ tesaṃ satisampajaññaṃ. Yasmā pana teneva cittena taṃ cittaṃ ñātuṃ na sakkā, tasmā cuticittaṃ na jānāti. Cutikkhaṇepi cavāmīti pajānāti, paṭisandhiṃ gahetvāpi paṭisandhicittaṃ na jānāti, asukasmiṃ ṭhāne paṭisandhi gahitāti pajānāti, tasmiṃ kāle dasasahassī kampatī’’ti. Evaṃ sato sampajāno mātukucchiṃ okkamanto pana ekūnavīsatiyā paṭisandhicittesu mettāpubbabhāgassa somanassa-sahagata-ñāṇasampayutta-asaṅkhārika-kusalacittassa sadisamahāvipākacittena paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi. Mahāsīvatthero pana ‘‘upekkhāsahagatenā’’ti āha.
当他结生时,是在阿沙陀月的满月日,依北阿沙陀星宿而结生。据说那时,摩诃摩耶王妃从满月前的第七天起,便享受离酒、具足花鬘香粉装饰的星宿庆典。到了第七天清晨,她起身,以香水沐浴,佩戴一切庄严,享用殊胜美食,受持布萨戒,随后进入寝宫,卧于殊胜的床榻。就在她入睡之际,做了这样一个梦:有四位大王连同床座将她抬起,带到无热恼池边,放在一旁。随后,那些天王的妃子们前来,为去除她身上属于人间的垢秽而为她沐浴,穿上天衣,涂以香料,佩戴天界之花。之后,不远处有一座银山,山中有一金殿。她们让她头朝东躺下。这时,菩萨化作一头殊胜的白象,在附近一座金山上游走,然后从金山而下,登上银山,自北方而来,进入金殿,右绕母亲之后,如同破开右胁一般,进入母胎。显示巴利原文
Paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhanto pana āsāḷhīpuṇṇamāyaṃ uttarāsāḷhanakkhattena aggahesi. Tadā kira mahāmāyā pure puṇṇamāya sattamadivasato paṭṭhāya vigatasurāpānaṃ mālāgandhavibhūsanasampannaṃ nakkhattakīḷaṃ anubhavamānā sattame divase pāto vuṭṭhāya gandhodakena nhāyitvā sabbālaṅkāravibhūsitā varabhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā uposathaṅgāni adhiṭṭhāya sirīgabbhaṃ pavisitvā sirīsayane nipannā niddaṃ okkamamānā idaṃ supinaṃ addasa – ‘‘cattāro kira naṃ mahārājāno sayaneneva saddhiṃ ukkhipitvā anotattadahaṃ netvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhaṃsu. Atha nesaṃ deviyo āgantvā manussamalaharaṇatthaṃ nhāpetvā dibbavatthaṃ nivāsetvā gandhehi vilimpetvā dibbapupphāni piḷandhitvā tato avidūre rajatapabbato, tassa anto kanakavimānaṃ atthi, tasmiṃ pācīnato sīsaṃ katvā nipajjāpesuṃ. Atha bodhisatto setavaravāraṇo hutvā tato avidūre eko suvaṇṇapabbato, tattha caritvā tato oruyha rajatapabbataṃ abhiruhitvā uttaradisato āgamma kanakavimānaṃ pavisitvā mātaraṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā dakkhiṇapassaṃ phāletvā kucchiṃ paviṭṭhasadiso ahosi.
随后,醒来的王妃将梦禀告国王。天亮之后,国王召来约六十四位婆罗门首领。他先在地上涂饰牛粪,撒上米花等作吉祥供养,铺设极为殊胜的座位。待婆罗门们就座,国王将酥油、蜜糖等精心烹制的殊胜乳粥盛满金盘与银盘,再用金盘银盘盖好,供养他们;又以未曾穿过的新衣、母牛等布施令他们欢喜。当婆罗门们被满足一切供养之后,国王便告知此梦,问道:‘将会发生什么事?’婆罗门们回答:‘大王,请勿忧虑!王妃胎中已安住一位胎儿,且是男胎,并非女胎,您将获得一位王子。如果他安住在家,将成为转轮王;如果离家出家,将成无上正觉佛陀,破除世间一切覆盖。’就这样,菩萨以正念正知从兜率天命终,而入母胎。显示巴利原文
Atha pabuddhā devī taṃ supinaṃ rañño ārocesi. Rājā pabhātāya rattiyā catusaṭṭhimatte brāhmaṇapāmokkhe pakkosāpetvā haritūpalittāya lājādīhi katamaṅgalasakkārāya bhūmiyā mahārahāni āsanāni paññāpetvā tattha nisinnānaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ sappimadhusakkarābhisaṅkhārassa varapāyāsassa suvaṇṇarajatapātiyo pūretvā suvaṇṇarajatapātītiheva paṭikujjitvā adāsi, aññehi ca ahatavatthakapilagāvīdānādīhi te santappesi. Atha nesaṃ sabbakāmasantappitānaṃ supinaṃ ārocāpetvā – ‘‘kiṃ bhavissatī’’ti pucchi. Brāhmaṇā āhaṃsu – ‘‘mā cintayi mahārāja, deviyā te kucchimhi gabbho patiṭṭhito, so ca kho purisagabbho, na itthigabbho, putto te bhavissati. So sace agāraṃ ajjhāvasissati, rājā bhavissati cakkavattī. Sace agārā nikkhamma pabbajissati, buddho bhavissati loke vivaṭṭacchado’’ti. Evaṃ sato sampajāno bodhisatto tusitakāyā cavitvā mātukucchiṃ okkamati.
其中,‘具念、正知’一句,是说明第四种入胎时的‘进入’。因为入胎共有四种。显示巴利原文
Tattha sato sampajānoti iminā catutthāya gabbhāvakkantiyā okkamatīti dasseti. Catasso hi gabbhāvakkantiyo.
“尊者,有四种入胎。尊者,在此,有一种人,全然不觉知而入母胎,全然不觉知而住于母胎,全然不觉知而出母胎。这是第一种入胎。显示巴利原文
‘‘Catasso imā, bhante, gabbhāvakkantiyo. Idha, bhante, ekacco asampajāno mātukucchiṃ okkamati, asampajāno mātukucchismiṃ ṭhāti, asampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, ayaṃ paṭhamā gabbhāvakkanti.
“再者,尊者,在此,有一种人,正知而入母胎,却不觉知而住于母胎,不觉知而出母胎。这是第二种入胎。显示巴利原文
Puna caparaṃ, bhante, idhekacco sampajāno mātukucchiṃ okkamati, asampajāno mātukucchismiṃ ṭhāti, asampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, ayaṃ dutiyā gabbhāvakkanti.
“再者,尊者,在此,有一种人,正知而入母胎,正知而住于母胎,却不觉知而出母胎。这是第三种入胎。显示巴利原文
Puna caparaṃ, bhante, idhekacco sampajāno mātukucchiṃ okkamati, sampajāno mātukucchismiṃ ṭhāti, asampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, ayaṃ tatiyā gabbhāvakkanti.
再者,尊者,有一种人有正知而入母胎,有正知而住母胎,有正知而出母胎。这是第四种入胎。显示巴利原文
Puna caparaṃ, bhante, idhekacco sampajāno mātukucchiṃ okkamati, sampajāno mātukucchismiṃ ṭhāti, sampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, ayaṃ catutthā gabbhāvakkantī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.147).
此四种入胎中,第一种属于世间凡夫,第二种属于八十位大弟子,第三种属于两位上首弟子与独觉佛,第四种属于一切智菩萨。据说,那些凡夫被业生风所驱,头下脚上,犹如堕入深达数百人高的悬崖,又如大象穿过钥匙孔般,从极其逼窄的产道出生,遭受无边痛苦,因此他们没有“我们正在出生”的正知。第四种是一切智菩萨,他们入胎时即有正知,住胎时亦有正知;出胎时,业生风也不能使他们头下脚上地抛出,他们伸出双手、睁开双眼,站立着出生。显示巴利原文
Etāsu paṭhamā lokiyamanussānaṃ hoti, dutiyā asītimahāsāvakānaṃ, tatiyā dvinnaṃ aggasāvakānaṃ paccekabodhisattānañca. Te kira kammajavātehi uddhaṃpādā adhosirā anekasataporise papāte viya yonimukhe tāḷacchiggalena hatthī viya ativiya sambādhena yonimukhena nikkhamamānā anantaṃ dukkhaṃ pāpuṇanti. Tena nesaṃ ‘‘mayaṃ nikkhamāmā’’ti sampajānatā na hoti. Catutthā sabbaññubodhisattānaṃ. Te hi mātukucchismiṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhantāpi jānanti, tattha vasantāpi jānanti. Nikkhamanakālepi nesaṃ kammajavātā uddhaṃpāde adhosire katvā khipituṃ na sakkonti, dve hatthe pasāretvā akkhīni ummīletvā ṭhitakāva nikkhamanti.
201 “入母胎”在此处是指已入胎的状态。因为是在入胎之后才有这些,而非正在入胎时。“无量”意为以佛陀为尺度,即广大的意思。“广大”是其同义词。“天威神力”指天神的威神力:其所着衣物的光芒遍照十二由旬,身体的光芒、饰物的光芒、宫殿的光芒亦复如是,意为超越于此。显示巴利原文
201.Mātukucchiṃ okkamatīti ettha mātukucchiṃ okkanto hotīti attho. Okkante hi tasmiṃ evaṃ hoti, na okkamamāne. Appamāṇoti buddhappamāṇo, vipuloti attho. Uḷāroti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Devānubhāvanti ettha devānaṃ ayamānubhāvo – nivatthavatthassa pabhā dvādasa yojanāni pharati, tathā sarīrassa, tathā alaṅkārassa, tathā vimānassa, taṃ atikkamitvāti attho.
“世界中间”:每三个轮围世界之间,就有一个世界中间地狱,犹如三个车轮,或三片相互倚靠的叶片之间的空隙。而那个世界中间地狱的范围,则有八千由旬。“可厌”:常时敞开。“无遮蔽”:下方无所支撑。“黑暗”:成为一片漆黑。“黑暗与暗冥”:因为障碍眼识生起,具有令人盲目的黑暗,据说那里眼识不会生起。“有如此大神力的”:据说日月天子仅一刹那便能同时显现于三洲,故说具有这样的大神力。“有如此大威力的”:他们能向每个方向驱散九万九千由旬的黑暗,显现光明,故说有大威力。“光明不能遍及”:指其光明无法照到。据说他们运行在轮围山中间,而世界中间地狱在轮围山之外,因此光明照不到那里。显示巴利原文
Lokantarikāti tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ cakkavāḷānaṃ antarā ekeko lokantarikā hoti, tiṇṇaṃ sakaṭacakkānaṃ pattānaṃ vā aññamaññaṃ āhacca ṭhapitānaṃ majjhe okāso viya. So pana lokantarikanirayo parimāṇato aṭṭhayojanasahasso hoti. Aghāti niccavivaṭā. Asaṃvutāti heṭṭhāpi appatiṭṭhā. Andhakārāti tamabhūtā. Andhakāratimisāti cakkhuviññāṇuppattinivāraṇato andhabhāvakaraṇatimisena samannāgatā. Tattha kira cakkhuviññāṇaṃ na jāyati. Evaṃmahiddhikāti candimasūriyā kira ekappahāreneva tīsu dīpesu paññāyanti, evaṃmahiddhikā. Ekekāya disāya navanavayojanasatasahassāni andhakāraṃ vidhamitvā ālokaṃ dassenti, evaṃ mahānubhāvā. Ābhāyanānubhontīti attano pabhāya nappahonti. Te kira cakkavāḷapabbatassa vemajjhena caranti, cakkavāḷapabbatañca atikkamma lokantarikanirayo, tasmā te tattha ābhāya nappahonti.
“其中还有众生”:指那些投生在那个世界中间大地狱中的众生。那么,他们是造了什么业而投生到那里的呢?他们对父母及如法的沙门婆罗门犯下极重残酷的过失,并日复一日行杀生等暴虐之业,如同铜掌岛上的无畏贼、龙贼等那样,以此投生到那里。他们的身体有三伽浮陀大,长着像蝙蝠一样的长长爪子。他们像蝙蝠攀在树上那样,用爪子钩在轮围山的山脚下。当他们蠕动爬行,彼此接近到伸手可及的距离时,便以为“我们得到食物了”,于是奋力冲向那里,翻滚着坠入支撑世界的水中。狂风吹打之下,他们犹如甘草的果实般断裂,落入水中。刚一落水,便在极咸的水中,像面团一样完全消融。显示巴利原文
Yepi tattha sattāti yepi tasmiṃ lokantaramahāniraye sattā upapannā. Kiṃ pana kammaṃ katvā te tattha uppajjantīti? Bhāriyaṃ dāruṇaṃ mātāpitūnaṃ dhammikasamaṇabrāhmaṇānañca upari aparādhaṃ aññañca divase divase pāṇavadhādisāhasikakammaṃ katvā uppajjanti tambapaṇṇidīpe abhayacoranāgacorādayo viya. Tesaṃ attabhāvo tigāvutiko hoti, vaggulīnaṃ viya dīghanakhā honti. Te rukkhe vagguliyo viya nakhehi cakkavāḷapāde lagganti. Yadā pana saṃsappantā aññamaññassa hatthapāsaṃ gatā honti, atha ‘‘bhakkho no laddho’’ti maññamānā tattha vāvaṭā viparivattitvā lokasandhārakaudake patanti. Vāte paharante madhukaphalāni viya chijjitvā udake patanti. Patitamattā ca accantakhāre udake piṭṭhapiṇḍi viya vilīyanti.
“朋友,据说还有其他众生”:在那一天,他们看见彼此后,便这样想:“正如我们正在承受这般巨大的痛苦,据说还有其他的众生,也受着这苦而投生于此。”然而,这种看见彼此的光明,持续时间甚至不够一碗粥的工夫,至多如同从睡梦中醒来辨识所缘的那一瞬间。但长部诵者说:“仅仅一弹指顷,如闪电一闪,在他们刚说出‘这是什么?’的当下,光明即灭。”“震动”:指周围一切震动。其他两个词只是它的同义词。接着所说的“无量”等,是作为结语的目的而说的。显示巴利原文
Aññepi kira bho santi sattāti – ‘‘yathā mayaṃ mahādukkhaṃ anubhavāma, evaṃ aññepi kira sattā idaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavantā idhūpapannā’’ti taṃ divasaṃ passanti. Ayaṃ pana obhāso ekayāgupānamattampi na tiṭṭhati, yāvatā niddāyitvā pabuddho ārammaṇaṃ vibhāveti, tattakaṃ kālaṃ hoti. Dīghabhāṇakā pana ‘‘accharāsaṅghāṭamattameva vijjubhāso viya niccharitvā kiṃ idanti bhaṇantānaṃyeva antaradhāyatī’’ti vadanti. Saṅkampatīti samantato kampati. Itaradvayaṃ purimapasseva vevacanaṃ. Puna appamāṇo cātiādi nigamanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.
202 “四位天子从四方前来守护”一句中,“四位”是就四大王而言的,但在整个一万轮围世界里,每一方各有四位,合起来共有四万位。在我们这个轮围世界,四大王手持宝剑,为守护菩萨前来,进入吉祥胎室;其余天王则从胎门开始,驱赶来作障碍的尘埃鬼、毕舍遮等药叉众,一直守护到轮围山之边际。显示巴利原文
202.Cattāro devaputtā catuddisaṃ ārakkhāya upagacchantīti ettha cattāroti catunnaṃ mahārājūnaṃ vasena vuttaṃ, dasasahassacakkavāḷe pana cattāro cattāro katvā cattālīsadasasahassā honti. Tattha imasmiṃ cakkavāḷe mahārājāno khaggahatthā āgantvā bodhisattassa ārakkhaṇatthāya upagantvā sirīgabbhaṃ paviṭṭhā, itare gabbhadvārato paṭṭhāya avaruddhapaṃsupisācakādiyakkhagaṇe paṭikkamāpetvā yāva cakkavāḷā ārakkhaṃ gaṇhiṃsu.
若问此守护有何目的呢?难道不是在结生刹那、从羯罗蓝阶段起,即便有百千亿的魔众举起百千亿座须弥山,前来对菩萨或菩萨的母亲作障,他们也都将在中途消失吗?世尊于《血生起事》中亦曾开示:“诸比丘,此事不可能,亦无机会,有人能以他害取走如来的性命。诸比丘,如来非因他害而般涅槃。汝等自去,诸比丘,如实而住,诸比丘,如来无须守护。”是故,菩萨与菩萨母不会因他人加害而遭遇生命之障。然而,有些非人相貌丑陋、形像可怖,还有些鸟,菩萨的母亲见到其形、听到其声时,可能会生起恐惧或惊慌;正是为了防护这些,他们才执持守护。再者,他们如此行持,也是因对菩萨的福德威力生起尊重,为尊重心所驱使。显示巴利原文
Kimatthaṃ panāyaṃ rakkhā āgatā? Nanu paṭisandhikkhaṇe kalalakālato paṭṭhāya sacepi koṭisatasahassā mārā koṭisatasahassaṃ sineruṃ ukkhipitvā bodhisattassa vā bodhisattamātuyā vā antarāyakaraṇatthaṃ āgaccheyyuṃ, sabbe antarāva antaradhāyeyyuṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā ruhiruppādavatthusmiṃ – ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ parūpakkamena tathāgataṃ jīvitā voropeyya. Anupakkamena, bhikkhave, tathāgatā parinibbāyanti. Gacchatha tumhe, bhikkhave, yathāvihāraṃ, arakkhiyā, bhikkhave, tathāgatā’’ti (cūḷava. 341). Evametaṃ, na parūpakkamena tesaṃ jīvitantarāyo atthi. Santi kho pana amanussā virūpā duddasikā, bheravarupā pakkhino, yesaṃ rūpaṃ disvā saddaṃ vā sutvā bodhisattamātu bhayaṃ vā santāso vā uppajjeyya, tesaṃ nivāraṇatthāya rakkhaṃ aggahesuṃ. Apica kho bodhisattassa puññatejena sañjātagāravā attano gāravacoditāpi te evamakaṃsu.
那么,这四位进入胎室便安住其中的四大王,是否让菩萨的母亲看见自己呢?在沐浴、妆饰、用餐等身体活动之时,他们并不现身;待菩萨的母亲进入吉祥胎室、卧于殊胜床座时,方才现身。通常说来,人类见到非人会感到恐惧,但菩萨的母亲因自身及儿子的福德威力,见到他们并不害怕,生起的心念,如同对自王宫中惯常的侍卫一般。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ pana te antogabbhaṃ pavisitvā ṭhitā cattāro mahārājāno bodhisattamātuyā attānaṃ dassenti na dassentīti? Nahānamaṇḍanabhojanādisarīrakiccakāle na dassenti, sirīgabbhaṃ pavisitvā varasayane nipannakāle pana dassenti. Tattha kiñcāpi amanussadassanaṃ nāma manussānaṃ sappaṭibhayaṃ hoti, bodhisattamātā pana attano ceva puttassa ca puññānubhāvena te disvā na bhāyati, pakatiantepurapālakesu viya assā tesu cittaṃ uppajjati.
203 “本性具戒”,是指她本性便具足戒,即天生戒行圆满。据说,在没有佛陀出世的时代,人们会到苦行者与游行者跟前,礼敬后蹲坐受戒;菩萨的母亲也曾到卡拉提婆拉仙人处受戒。然而,当菩萨入胎之后,她便不能再坐于他人足下;即便与人同坐一个座位受戒,也仅是徒具形式。因此,说她自行受持了戒。显示巴利原文
203.Pakatiyāsīlavatīti sabhāveneva sīlasampannā. Anuppanne kira buddhe manussā tāpasaparibbājakānaṃ santike vanditvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā sīlaṃ gaṇhanti, bodhisattamātāpi kāladevilassa isino santike gaṇhāti. Bodhisatte pana kucchigate aññassa pādamūle nisīdituṃ nāma na sakkā, samāsane nisīditvā gahitasīlampi avaññā kāraṇamattaṃ hoti. Tasmā sayameva sīlaṃ aggahesīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“于诸男子”,是指她对以菩萨的父亲为首的一切男子,都不生起以男子为对象的欲贪心。而且,这是出于对菩萨的尊重,并非因为她的烦恼已经断除。另外,菩萨母亲的容貌,即便是极其善巧的画师,也无法在画布等处描绘出来;见到这般美貌,若说男子全然不生贪欲,那也不真实。然而,若有怀贪染心者想要靠近她,他的脚便无法移动,犹如被天神的锁链捆住。因此,经典中说她是“不可逾越”的等。显示巴利原文
Purisesūti bodhisattassa pitaraṃ ādiṃ katvā kesuci manussesu purisādhippāyacittaṃ nuppajjati. Tañca kho bodhisatte gāravena, na pahīnakilesatāya. Bodhisattamātu rūpaṃ pana sukusalāpi sippikā potthakammādīsupi kātuṃ na sakkonti, taṃ disvā purisassa rāgo nuppajjatīti na sakkā vattuṃ. Sace pana taṃ rattacitto upasaṅkamitukāmo hoti, pādā na vahanti, dibbasaṅkhalikā viya bajjhanti. Tasmā ‘‘anatikkamanīyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“于五欲功德”,前文中“与欲功德相应”一语,是基于以男子为对象的意欲,讲述了所应遮止之事;而此处则是显示这些欲乐所缘的获得。据说,当听到“王后腹中怀上了如此一位儿子”的消息,各处的国王们便以昂贵的饰物、乐器等,送来与五门相应的所缘礼物。又因菩萨与菩萨母亲过去所造之业极其广大,他们所获得的利养与恭敬,数量无边,无法衡量其边际。显示巴利原文
Pañcannaṃ kāmaguṇānanti pubbe ‘‘kāmaguṇūpasaṃhita’’nti purisādhippāyavasena vatthupaṭikkhepo kathito, idha ārammaṇappaṭilābho dassito. Tadā kira ‘‘deviyā evarūpo putto kucchismiṃ uppanno’’ti, sutvā samantato rājāno mahagghaābharaṇatūriyādivasena pañcadvārārammaṇavatthubhūtaṃ paṇṇākāraṃ pesenti, bodhisattassa ca bodhisattamātuyā ca katakammassa ussannattā lābhasakkārassa pamāṇaparicchedo nāma natthi.
204 “身体不疲倦”,是指她不像其他妇女那样,因怀胎的重担而疲劳,手脚浮肿之类,她没有丝毫那样的疲倦。“透过腹部可见的胎儿”,是指处于腹中的胎儿。这已超越了羯罗蓝等阶段,在身体各部分、手脚都已长成,诸根完备无缺时,她才看见。为何能看见呢?是为了安乐地护养。就好像母亲与儿子同坐或共卧时,为了儿子安适而照看,心想:“我要把那垂下来的手或脚抬起来放好。”同样地,菩萨的母亲在起身、行走、转身、坐下时,以及在遇到冷、热、咸、淡、苦、辣的食物下咽时,都会观察:“我的儿子会不会不舒服?”为了安适而照看菩萨,她便看见了结跏趺坐的菩萨。别的胎儿在母胎中,是压着直肠,顶起胃部,以腹膜为靠背,倚着脊柱,像下大雨时躲在树洞里的猴子那样,蹲着,两手托腮而坐。菩萨却不是这样。菩萨以脊柱为靠背,如同坐在法座上的说法师,盘起双腿,结跏趺坐,面朝东方。菩萨过去所造的业,净化了投生处的基础,在清净的基础上,生出了极为细嫩的肤色。于是,腹内的皮肤便遮盖不住他,母亲观看时,便能看见。显示巴利原文
204.Akilantakāyāti yathā aññā itthiyo gabbhabhārena kilamanti, hatthapādā uddhumātakādīni pāpuṇanti, na evaṃ tassā koci kilamatho ahosi. Tirokucchigatanti antokucchigataṃ. Kalalādikālaṃ atikkamitvā sañjātaaṅgapaccaṅgaṃ ahīnindriyabhāvaṃ upagataṃyeva passati. Kimatthaṃ passati? Sukhavāsatthaṃ. Yatheva hi mātā puttena saddhiṃ nisinnā vā nipannā vā ‘‘hatthaṃ vā pādaṃ vā olambantaṃ ukkhipitvā saṇṭhapessāmī’’ti sukhavāsatthaṃ puttaṃ oloketi, evaṃ bodhisattamātāpi yaṃ taṃ mātu uṭṭhānagamanaparivattananisajjādīsu uṇhasītaloṇikatittakakaṭukāhāraajjhoharaṇakālesu ca gabbhassa dukkhaṃ uppajjati, atthi nu kho me taṃ puttassāti sukhavāsatthaṃ bodhisattaṃ olokayamānā pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisinnaṃ bodhisattaṃ passati. Yathā hi aññe antokucchigatā pakkāsayaṃ ajjhottharitvā āmāsayaṃ ukkhipitvā udarapaṭalaṃ piṭṭhito katvā piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃ nissāya ukkuṭikā dvīsu muṭṭhīsu hanukaṃ ṭhapetvā deve vassante rukkhasusire makkaṭā viya nisīdanti, na evaṃ bodhisatto. Bodhisatto pana piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃ piṭṭhito katvā dhammāsane dhammakathiko viya pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā puratthābhimukho nisīdati. Pubbe katakammaṃ panassā vatthuṃ sodheti, suddhe vatthumhi sukhumacchavilakkhaṇaṃ nibbattati . Atha naṃ kucchigataṃ taco paṭicchādetuṃ na sakkoti, olokentiyā bahi ṭhito viya paññāyati. Tamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvento seyyathāpītiādimāha. Bodhisatto pana antokucchigato mātaraṃ na passati. Na hi antokucchiyaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ uppajjati.
205 “命终”,并非因为分娩,而是纯粹由于寿命尽了。菩萨曾经住过的地方,犹如塔庙或佛殿一般,是其他人不能受用的;而且,也不能将菩萨的母亲移走,另立他人为王后,所以菩萨母亲的寿命恰恰就只有那么多,因此她便在那个时候去世了。那么,她是在什么年纪去世的呢?是在中年。因为在青年时期,有情对自己身体的欲贪很强盛,因此那时怀孕的妇人难以保住胎儿,胎儿也常常多病。而中年阶段分为三个部分,过了前两部分,到了第三部分时,母胎的基础便变得清净;在清净的母胎里出生的孩子,是健康的。所以,菩萨的母亲也是先在青年时期享受了盛美,然后在中年的第三部分时,分娩并离世。显示巴利原文
205.Kālaṃkarotīti na vijātabhāvapaccayā, āyuparikkhayeneva. Bodhisattena vasitaṭṭhānañhi cetiyakuṭisadisaṃ hoti aññesaṃ aparibhogaṃ, na ca sakkā bodhisattamātaraṃ apanetvā aññaṃ aggamahesiṭṭhāne ṭhapetunti tattakaṃyeva bodhisattamātu āyuppamāṇaṃ hoti, tasmā tadā kālaṃ karoti. Katarasmiṃ pana vaye kālaṃ karotīti? Majjhimavaye. Paṭhamavayasmiñhi sattānaṃ attabhāve chandarāgo balavā hoti, tena tadā sañjātagabbhā itthī taṃ gabbhaṃ anurakkhituṃ na sakkonti, gabbho bahvābādho hoti. Majjhimavayassa pana dve koṭṭhāse atikkamma tatiyakoṭṭhāse vatthuṃ visadaṃ hoti, visade vatthumhi nibbattā dārakā arogā honti. Tasmā bodhisattamātāpi paṭhamavaye sampattiṃ anubhavitvā majjhimavayassa tatiyakoṭṭhāse vijāyitvā kālaṃ karoti.
“九或十”:这里用“或”字,应知是以简别的方式,也包含了七或八、十一或十二等种种情况。其中,七个月出生的能存活,但不耐冷热;八个月出生的不能存活;其余月份出生的皆能存活。显示巴利原文
Nava vā dasa vāti ettha vā-saddena vikappanavasena satta vā aṭṭha vā ekādasa vā dvādasa vāti evamādīnampi saṅgaho veditabbo. Tattha sattamāsajāto jīvati, sītuṇhakkhamo pana na hoti. Aṭṭhamāsajāto na jīvati, sesā jīvanti.
“站立”即站立着的状态。摩耶夫人临产时,禀告国王说:“我要回娘家所在的村庄去。”国王便命人将迦毗罗卫城通往天臂城的大道装饰一新,并令夫人乘坐金轿。全城释迦族人都跟随在后,以香、花等供养,簇拥着夫人前行。当行至离天臂城不远的蓝毘尼娑罗林园时,她生起了游园之念,便让人转告国王。国王于是命人修整园林,布置守卫。夫人刚入园林,便感身体虚弱,于是众人在吉祥娑罗树下为她铺设吉祥卧具,围起帷幕。她走入帷幕,手攀娑罗树枝,站立在那里。就在那一刹那,她便分娩了。显示巴利原文
Ṭhitāvāti ṭhitāva hutvā. Mahāmāyāpi devī upavijaññā ñātikulagharaṃ gamissāmīti rañño ārocesi. Rājā kapilavatthuto devadahanagaragāmimaggaṃ alaṅkārāpetvā deviṃ suvaṇṇasivikāya nisīdāpesi. Sakalanagaravāsino sakyā parivāretvā gandhamālādīhi pūjayamānā deviṃ gahetvā pāyiṃsu. Sā devadahanagarassa avidūre lumbinisālavanuyyānaṃ disvā uyyānavicaraṇatthāya cittaṃ uppādetvā rañño saññaṃ adāsi. Rājā uyyānaṃ paṭijaggāpetvā ārakkhaṃ saṃvidahāpesi. Deviyā uyyānaṃ paviṭṭhamattāya kāyadubbalyaṃ ahosi, athassā maṅgalasālamūle sirīsayanaṃ paññāpetvā sāṇiyā parikkhipiṃsu. Sā antosāṇiṃ pavisitvā sālasākhaṃ hatthena gahetvā aṭṭhāsi. Athassā tāvadeva gabbhavuṭṭhānaṃ ahosi.
“天神们首先接取他”:指漏尽者和净居梵天前来承接。如何承接呢?一种说法是,他们化现为接生婆的形貌。但驳斥此说后,如下所说才为正解:那时,菩萨的母亲内着镶金的衣物,外披如鱼眼般精致的细白布,下垂至脚踝,站立着。接着,她极为轻安地分娩了,如同水从法造之器中流出一般。随后,那些梵天便以其原本的梵天形貌上前,首先用金网承接。接着,人们又从他们手中用细布垫承接。因此,经中说:“天神们先接取他,然后人们才接取。”显示巴利原文
Devā naṃ paṭhamaṃ paṭiggaṇhantīti khīṇāsavā suddhāvāsabrahmāno paṭiggaṇhanti. Kathaṃ? Sūtivesaṃ gaṇhitvāti eke. Taṃ pana paṭikkhipitvā idaṃ vuttaṃ – tadā bodhisattamātā suvaṇṇakhacitaṃ vatthaṃ nivāsetvā macchakkhisadisaṃ dukūlapaṭaṃ yāva pādantāva pārupitvā aṭṭhāsi. Athassā sallahukaṃ gabbhavuṭṭhānaṃ ahosi dhammakaraṇato udakanikkhamanasadisaṃ. Atha te pakatibrahmaveseneva upasaṅkamitvā paṭhamaṃ suvaṇṇajālena paṭiggahesuṃ. Tesaṃ hatthato manussā dukūlacumbaṭakena paṭiggahesuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘devā naṃ paṭhamaṃ paṭiggaṇhanti pacchā manussā’’ti.
206 “四天子”:指四大王。“接取”:指用羚羊皮垫来承接。“大威德者”:指具有大威力、大名声、具足相好之人。显示巴利原文
206.Cattāro naṃ devaputtāti cattāro mahārājāno. Paṭiggahetvāti ajinappaveṇiyā paṭiggahetvā. Mahesakkhoti mahātejo mahāyaso lakkhaṇasampannoti attho.
“无着地出来”意为:不像其他众生那样卡在产道,被弄得支离破碎才出来;他不是那样出胎,而是毫无黏着地出来。“以水”:指用水。“不被任何不净”:是说他不像其他众生,被业生风抛掷,头下脚上地塞进产道,犹如坠入百人深的悬崖地狱,又像从钥匙孔中被硬拽出来的大象,遭受极大的痛苦,全身涂满种种不净物而出。菩萨则不然,业生风无法令他头下脚上。他就像从法座上走下来的说法师,又像从梯子上走下来的人,伸展手脚,站立着从母胎出来,不沾染母胎中的任何不净。显示巴利原文
Visadova nikkhamatīti yathā aññe sattā yonimagge laggantā bhaggavibhaggā nikkhamanti, na evaṃ nikkhamati, alaggo hutvā nikkhamatīti attho. Udenāti udakena. Kenaci asucināti yathā aññe sattā kammajavātehi uddhaṃpādā adhosirā yonimagge pakkhittā sataporisanarakapapātaṃ patantā viya tāḷacchiddena nikkaḍḍhiyamānā hatthī viya mahādukkhaṃ anubhavantā nānāasucimakkhitāva nikkhamanti, na evaṃ bodhisatto. Bodhisattañhi kammajavātā uddhaṃpādaṃ adhosiraṃ kātuṃ na sakkonti. So dhammāsanato otaranto dhammakathiko viya nisseṇito otaranto puriso viya ca dve hatthe ca pāde ca pasāretvā ṭhitakova mātukucchisambhavena kenaci asucinā amakkhitova nikkhamati.
“水的流淌”:指水柱。其中冷水落入金盆,热水落入银盆。这是为了显示,大地上丝毫不掺杂不净,这是他们的饮用水及沐浴水,也是他人不能共享的游戏之水。至于其他人用金银罐取来的水,或是从饰有天鹅轮等的池塘里取来的水,则不在此限。显示巴利原文
Udakassa dhārāti udakavaṭṭiyo. Tāsu sītā suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patati, uṇhā rajatakaṭāhe. Idañca pathavītale kenaci asucinā asammissaṃ tesaṃ pānīyaparibhojanīyaudakañceva aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ kīḷanaudakañca dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Aññassa pana suvaṇṇarajataghaṭehi āhariyamānaudakassa ceva haṃsavaṭṭakādipokkharaṇigatassa ca udakassa paricchedo natthi.
207 “正生者”:指刚刚出生的那一刻。虽然在经文中看似刚从母胎出来,但不应当这样理解。因为刚出胎时,首先是梵天用金网承接;从他们手中,四大王用被视为吉祥、触感舒适的羚羊皮垫承接;又从他们手中,人们用细布垫承接;最后从人们手中脱离,才站立在大地之上。显示巴利原文
207.Sampatijātoti muhuttajāto. Pāḷiyaṃ pana mātukucchito nikkhantamatto viya dassito, na pana evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nikkhantamattañhi taṃ paṭhamaṃ brahmāno suvaṇṇajālena paṭiggaṇhiṃsu, tesaṃ hatthato cattāro mahārājāno maṅgalasammatāya sukhasamphassāya ajinappaveṇiyā, tesaṃ hatthato manussā dukūlacumbaṭakena, manussānaṃ hatthato muccitvā pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhito.
「当白色伞盖被执持时」:指天界的白色伞盖正被执持之时。这里,不仅伞盖本身,其随从物品如剑等五种王权标志也都出现了。但在经文中,如同国王出行时只提及伞盖,这里也只提到伞盖。在那些物品中,只见伞盖,不见执持伞盖者。同样,只见剑、扇、孔雀羽扇、牦牛尾拂尘、头巾,皆不见执持它们的人。据说,这一切全都是由肉眼看不见的天神所执持。经中又这样说:显示巴利原文
Setamhi chatte anudhāriyamāneti dibbasetacchatte anudhāriyamāne. Ettha ca chattassa parivārāni khaggādīni pañca rājakakudhabhaṇḍānipi āgatāneva. Pāḷiyaṃ pana rājagamane rājā viya chattameva vuttaṃ. Tesu chattameva paññāyati, na chattaggāhakā. Tathā khagga-tālavaṇṭa-morahatthaka-vāḷabījani-uṇhīsamattāyeva paññāyanti, na tesaṃ gāhakā. Sabbāni kira tāni adissamānarūpā devatā gaṇhiṃsu. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
「具有无数分支与千辐的伞盖」,
「诸天在空中执持伞盖;」
金柄拂尘纷纷飘动,
「却看不见持拂尘和伞盖的人。」(su. ni. 693)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Anekasākhañca sahassamaṇḍalaṃ, Chattaṃ marū dhārayumantalikkhe; Suvaṇṇadaṇḍā vipatanti cāmarā, Na dissare cāmarachattagāhakā’’ti. (su. ni. 693);
“一切方”(Sabbā ca disā)这句,是形容如同站在七步跨行之上那般遍观所有方位,但不应这样理解。因为大士(菩萨)从众人手中挣脱后,向东方的方向看去,那时无数千世界变得如同一片平地。那里的天与人以香、花等供养着,说道:“大士,在这里连与你相似者都找不到,哪里还有更超胜的呢?”就这样,遍观了四方、四维、下方、上方这十方之后,见不到与自己相似者,于是说出“这是最上的方向”(uttarā disā),再以七步跨行而去。应这样了知此中的含义。“Āsabha”指最上。“Agga”指在功德上最第一。其余两个词也是它的同义词。“这是最后生,现在没有后有”(Ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavo)这两句,是授记他在这个有身中将要证得的阿罗汉果。显示巴利原文
Sabbā ca disāti idaṃ sattapadavītihārūpari ṭhitassa viya sabbadisānuvilokanaṃ vuttaṃ, na kho panevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Mahāsatto hi manussānaṃ hatthato muccitvā puratthimadisaṃ olokesi, anekacakkavāḷasahassāni ekaṅgaṇāni ahesuṃ. Tattha devamanussā gandhamālādīhi pūjayamānā – ‘‘mahāpurisa idha tumhehi sadisopi natthi, kuto uttaritaro’’ti āhaṃsu. Evaṃ catasso disā, catasso anudisā, heṭṭhā, uparīti dasapi disā anuviloketvā attanā sadisaṃ adisvā ayaṃ uttarā disāti sattapadavītihārena agamāsīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Āsabhinti uttamaṃ. Aggoti guṇehi sabbapaṭhamo. Itarāni dve padāni etasseva vevacanāni. Ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavoti padadvayena imasmiṃ attabhāve pattabbaṃ arahattaṃ byākāsi.
在这里,他以平整的双足站立于大地,这是将来获得四神足的前兆;面向北方,是将来超越大众、征服大众而行的前兆;行走七步,是将来获得七觉支宝的前兆;天界白伞遮覆头顶,是将来获得解脱之伞的前兆;具足五种王者庄严,是将来依五种解脱而得解脱的前兆;遍观诸方,是将来获得无碍智的前兆;宣说大丈夫语,是将来转动不退转法轮的前兆。当知,“这是最后生”的狮子吼,是将来于无余涅槃界般涅槃的前兆。这些瑞相在经文中出现,而“众多瑞相”也被提及,应当引出加以阐明。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca samehi pādehi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhānaṃ catuiddhipādapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, uttarābhimukhabhāvo mahājanaṃ ajjhottharitvā abhibhavitvā gamanassa pubbanimittaṃ , sattapadagamanaṃ sattabojjhaṅgaratanapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, dibbasetacchattadhāraṇaṃ vimutticchattapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, pañcarājakakudhabhaṇḍāni pañcahi vimuttīhi vimuccanassa pubbanimittaṃ, disānuvilokanaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, āsabhīvācābhāsanaṃ appaṭivattiyadhammacakkappavattanassa pubbanimittaṃ. ‘‘Ayamantimā jātī’’ti sīhanādo anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbānassa pubbanimittanti veditabbaṃ. Ime vārā pāḷiyaṃ āgatā, sambahulavāro pana āgato, āharitvā dīpetabbo.
在大士诞生之日,十千世界震动。十千世界的诸天同聚于一个轮围之内。诸天先接取,众人随后接取。弦乐器、皮鼓无人演奏而自行鸣响;人们身上的枷锁、脚镣等物碎作片片;一切疾病如同被酸汁洗尽的铜垢一样消失;生来盲目的人看见了色相;生来耳聋的人听到了声音;跛者步履轻快;那些生来痴默乃至聋哑的人也生起忆念;驶往异域的船只顺利抵达良港;居于空中与地上的宝物各自放出光芒;怨敌之间心生慈心;无间地狱的火熄灭;世界中间出现光明;河流中水不再流动;大海的水变得甘甜;风不再吹动;栖息空中、山巅与树上的鸟都落到地面;月亮格外明亮;太阳既不灼热也不寒冷,清净无垢,时节温和;诸天站在各自天宫门口,以拍手、欢笑、举衣等方式作大欢庆;四大洲降下大雨;大众无饥无渴的逼恼;门户自行开启;应时的花树、果树一齐开花、结果;十千世界成为同一花鬘串联的幢幡。显示巴利原文
Mahāpurisassa hi jātadivase dasasahassilokadhātu kampi. Dasasahassilokadhātumhi devatā ekacakkavāḷe sannipatiṃsu. Paṭhamaṃ devā paṭiggahiṃsu, pacchā manussā. Tantibaddhā vīṇā cammabaddhā bheriyo ca kenaci avāditā sayameva vajjiṃsu, manussānaṃ andubandhanādīni khaṇḍākhaṇḍaṃ bhijjiṃsu. Sabbarogā ambilena dhotatambamalaṃ viya vigacchiṃsu, jaccandhā rūpāni passiṃsu. Jaccabadhirā saddaṃ suṇiṃsu, pīṭhasappī javanasampannā ahesuṃ, jātijaḷānampi eḷamūgānaṃ sati patiṭṭhāsi, videse pakkhandanāvā supaṭṭanaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, ākāsaṭṭhakabhūmaṭṭhakaratanāni sakatejobhāsitāni ahesuṃ, verino mettacittaṃ paṭilabhiṃsu, avīcimhi aggi nibbāyi. Lokantare āloko udapādi, nadīsu jalaṃ na pavatti, mahāsamuddesu madhurasadisaṃ udakaṃ ahosi, vāto na vāyi, ākāsapabbatarukkhagatā sakuṇā bhassitvā pathavīgatā ahesuṃ, cando atiroci, sūriyo na uṇho na sītalo nimmalo utusampanno ahosi, devatā attano attano vimānadvāre ṭhatvā apphoṭanaseḷanacelukkhepādīhi mahākīḷaṃ kīḷiṃsu, cātuddīpikamahāmegho vassi, mahājanaṃ neva khudā na pipāsā pīḷesi, dvārakavāṭāni sayameva vivariṃsu, pupphūpagaphalūpagā rukkhā pupphaphalāni gaṇhiṃsu, dasasahassilokadhātu ekaddhajamālā ahosīti.
在这些瑞相中,十千世界震动,是他将来获得一切知智的前兆;诸天在一个轮围内聚集,是将来转法轮之时,他们一时齐集听法的前兆;诸天先接取,是将来获得四种色界禅那的前兆;众人后接取,是将来获得四无色界禅那的前兆;弦乐器自鸣,是将来获得次第住的前兆;皮鼓自鸣,是将来奏响大法鼓的前兆;枷锁等物断裂,是将来断除我慢的前兆;一切疾病消失,是将来一切烦恼消尽的前兆;生来盲目的人见到色相,是将来获得天眼的前兆;生来耳聋的人听见声音,是将来获得天耳界的前兆;跛者轻快,是将来证得四神足的前兆;愚痴者生起忆念,是将来获得四念住的前兆;驶往异域的船泊抵良港,是将来证得四无碍解的前兆;宝物自放光芒,是将来为世间示现法光的前兆。显示巴利原文
Tatrāpissa dasasahassilokadhātukampo sabbaññutañāṇapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, devatānaṃ ekacakkavāḷe sannipāto dhammacakkappavattanakāle ekappahārena sannipatitvā dhammapaṭiggaṇhanassa pubbanimittaṃ, paṭhamaṃ devatānaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ catunnaṃ rūpāvacarajjhānānaṃ paṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ. Pacchā manussānaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ catunnaṃ arūpajjhānānaṃ paṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, tantibaddhavīṇānaṃ sayaṃ vajjanaṃ anupubbavihārapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, cammabaddhabherīnaṃ vajjanaṃ mahatiyā dhammabheriyā anussāvanassa pubbanimittaṃ, andubandhanādīnaṃ chedo asmimānasamucchedassa pubbanimittaṃ, sabbarogavigamo sabbakilesavigamassa pubbanimittaṃ, jaccandhānaṃ rūpadassanaṃ dibbacakkhupaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, jaccabadhirānaṃ saddassavanaṃ dibbasotadhātupaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ , pīṭhasappīnaṃ javanasampadā catuiddhipādādhigamassa pubbanimittaṃ, jaḷānaṃ satipatiṭṭhānaṃ catusatipaṭṭhānapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, videsapakkhandanāvānaṃ supaṭṭanasampāpuṇanaṃ catupaṭisambhidādhigamassa pubbanimittaṃ, ratanānaṃ sakatejobhāsitattaṃ yaṃ lokassa dhammobhāsaṃ dassessati tassa pubbanimittaṃ.
「怨敌得获慈心」,是成就四梵住的前兆;「无间地狱之火熄灭」,是十一种火熄灭的前兆;「世界中间的光明」,是破除无明黑暗、现见智光的前兆;「大海的甘甜」,是以涅槃味而成一味体的前兆;「风不吹动」,是摧破六十二种邪见的前兆;「飞鸟落于地面」,是大众听闻教导后、于有生之年便生起皈依的前兆;「月亮格外皎洁」,是广受众人喜爱的前兆;「太阳无炎无寒、时节温和」,是身心喜乐生起的前兆;「诸天在宫门前拍手嬉戏」,是成佛之后宣说优陀那的前兆;「四大洲普降大雨」,是佛陀降下广大法雨的前兆;「不为饥饿所迫」,是获得身至念这一甘露的前兆;「不为干渴所逼」,是藉解脱之乐而安享安乐的前兆;「门户自行开启」,是八支圣道之门洞开的前兆;「树木开花结果」,是以解脱之花绽放、并以沙门果的重担为庄严的前兆;「十千世界同一幢幡花鬘」,是被圣者的幢幡花鬘所庄严的前兆。应当如此了解。这便是『众多问分』的意思。显示巴利原文
Verīnaṃ mettacittapaṭilābho catubrahmavihārapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, avīcimhi agginibbānaṃ ekādasaagginibbānassa pubbanimittaṃ, lokantarāloko avijjandhakāraṃ vidhamitvā ñāṇālokadassanassa pubbanimittaṃ, mahāsamuddassa madhuratā nibbānarasena ekarasabhāvassa pubbanimittaṃ, vātassa avāyanaṃ dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatabhindanassa pubbanimittaṃ, sakuṇānaṃ pathavīgamanaṃ mahājanassa ovādaṃ sutvā pāṇehi saraṇagamanassa pubbanimittaṃ, candassa ativirocanaṃ bahujanakantatāya pubbanimittaṃ, sūriyassa uṇhasītavivajjanautusukhatā kāyikacetasikasukhuppattiyā pubbanimittaṃ, devatānaṃ vimānadvāresu apphoṭanādīhi kīḷanaṃ buddhabhāvaṃ patvā udānaṃ udānassa pubbanimittaṃ, cātuddīpikamahāmeghavassanaṃ mahato dhammameghavassanassa pubbanimittaṃ, khudāpīḷanassa abhāvo kāyagatāsatiamatapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, pipāsāpīḷanassa abhāvo vimuttisukhena sukhitabhāvassa pubbanimittaṃ, dvārakavāṭānaṃ sayameva vivaraṇaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikamaggadvāravivaraṇassa pubbanimittaṃ, rukkhānaṃ pupphaphalagahaṇaṃ vimuttipupphehi pupphitassa ca sāmaññaphalabhārabharitabhāvassa ca pubbanimittaṃ, dasasahassilokadhātuyā ekaddhajamālatā ariyaddhajamālāmālitāya pubbanimittanti veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ sambahulavāro nāma.
于此,有人提出这样的问题:『当那位大人立于大地,面朝北方行走,并宣说如牛王般无畏之语时——他当时究竟是在地上行走,还是行于空中?是显现其身而行,抑或不显其身?是犹如裸形者那样而行,还是衣饰庄严、打扮齐整?是以年轻的模样而行,还是以老迈之躯而行?后来他仍保持原样,还是又变回了孩童?』然而,这个问题早在先前的铜殿僧众集会中,便已由三藏小龙长老解答过了。据说,长老当时先依决定论、宿作因论、自在天变化论等演说种种道理,最后这样总结解答道:『那位大人实则行于地上,但在众人眼中,却仿佛行于空中;确实显露其身而行,但在众人看来,却仿佛隐没而行;确实如裸形者而行,但在众人眼中,却仿佛衣饰庄严、打扮齐整;确实以年轻的模样而行,但在众人看来,犹如一位约十六岁的青年。至于后来,他只是个幼童,并非先前那般模样。』当长老这般宣说时,在场大众皆心生欢喜,说道:『尊者长老啊,您解答问题的方式,真如佛陀一般!』显示巴利原文
Ettha pañhe pucchanti – ‘‘yadā mahāpuriso pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvā uttarābhimukho gantvā āsabhiṃ vācaṃ bhāsati, tadā kiṃ pathaviyā gato , udāhu ākāsena? Dissamāno gato, udāhu adissamāno? Acelako gato, udāhu alaṅkatappaṭiyatto? Daharo hutvā gato, udāhu mahallako? Pacchāpi kiṃ tādisova ahosi, udāhu puna bāladārako’’ti? Ayaṃ pana pañho heṭṭhā lohapāsāde saṅghasannipāte tipiṭakacūḷābhayattherena vissajjitova. Thero kirettha niyati pubbekatakamma-issaranimmānavādavasena taṃ taṃ bahuṃ vatvā avasāne evaṃ byākāsi – ‘‘mahāpuriso pathaviyaṃ gato, mahājanassa pana ākāse gacchanto viya ahosi. Dissamāno gato, mahājanassa pana adissamāno viya ahosi. Acelako gato, mahājanassa pana alaṅkatappaṭiyattova upaṭṭhāsi. Daharova gato, mahājanassa pana soḷasavassuddesiko viya ahosi. Pacchā pana bāladārakova ahosi, na tādiso’’ti. Evaṃ vutte parisā cassa ‘‘buddhena viya hutvā bho therena pañho kathito’’ti attamanā ahosi. Lokantarikavāro vuttanayo eva.
「明知」的意思是:变得清楚明白。譬如,声闻弟子们在沐浴、洗脸、嚼齿木、进食、饮水等时候,对于那些已成过去的诸行,若尚未进入他们所观察的范围,便不能普遍加以审察;只有当这些法成为他们观察的对象时,他们才予以审察。然而,诸佛并非如此。对于七日之内已确定的诸行,诸佛从起始便一一审察,将无常、苦、无我这三相安立其上,方才放下。对诸佛而言,绝无未曾被他们以智观察过的法。因此,世尊才说『明知』。其余内容,在一切处都很明白。显示巴利原文
Viditāti pākaṭā hutvā. Yathā hi sāvakā nahānamukhadhovanakhādanapivanādikāle anokāsagate atītasaṅkhāre nippadese sammasituṃ na sakkonti, okāsapattayeva sammasanti, na evaṃ buddhā. Buddhā hi sattadivasabbhantare vavatthitasaṅkhāre ādito paṭṭhāya sammasitvā tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvāva vissajjenti, tesaṃ avipassitadhammo nāma natthi, tasmā ‘‘viditā’’ti āha. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
第四 跋拘罗经的解说显示巴利原文
4. Bākulasuttavaṇṇanā
209 如是我闻等语,此为《拔古喇经》。其中,「拔古喇」一名,正如本应说「二十二」「三十二」而常说成「二十二」「三十二」一样,本应说「两家」,却说成了「拔古喇」。因为这位长老有两家亲属。据说,他从天界殁后,转生到憍赏弥城一个巨富之家。在他出生后的第五天,家人为他洗头,带他到恒河边玩耍。当保姆抱着他在水中起伏嬉戏时,有一条鱼看见这孩子,心想:「这是我的食物呀!」便张开口游了过来。保姆吓得丢下孩子转身就逃,鱼便把孩子吞了下去。这孩子有大福德,因此并未受苦,犹如进了自己的卧室安然躺卧一般。而那条鱼由于孩子的威德光芒,仿佛吞下了一块烧得滚烫的金属片,被灼烧得难以忍受,飞速游了三十由旬的路程,一头撞进了波罗奈城一位渔夫的渔网里。通常,那些被称为大鱼者一旦被网住,遭受击打时便会死去。而这条鱼,由于孩子威德之力,刚被拖出渔网就立即死了。渔夫们捕到这条大鱼,正准备剖开售卖,却因孩子威德力的缘故,鱼身根本无法被剖开,他们只好显示巴利原文
209.Evaṃme sutanti bākulasuttaṃ. Tattha bākuloti yathā dvāvīsati dvattiṃsātiādimhi vattabbe bāvīsati bāttiṃsātiādīni vuccanti, evameva dvikuloti vattabbe bākuloti vuttaṃ. Tassa hi therassa dve kulāni ahesuṃ. So kira devaloko cavitvā kosambinagare nāma mahāseṭṭhikule nibbatto, tamenaṃ pañcame divase sīsaṃ nhāpetvā gaṅgākīḷaṃ akaṃsu. Dhātiyā dārakaṃ udake nimujjanummujjanavasena kīḷāpentiyā eko maccho dārakaṃ disvā ‘‘bhakkho me aya’’nti maññamāno mukhaṃ vivaritvā upagato. Dhātī dārakaṃ chaḍḍetvā palātā. Maccho taṃ gili. Puññavā satto dukkhaṃ na pāpuṇi, sayanagabbhaṃ pavisitvā nipanno viya ahosi. Maccho dārakassa tejena tattakapallaṃ gilitvā dayhamāno viya vegena tiṃsayojanamaggaṃ gantvā bārāṇasinagaravāsino macchabandhassa jālaṃ pāvisi, mahāmacchā nāma jālabaddhā pahariyamānā maranti. Ayaṃ pana dārakassa tejena jālato nīhaṭamattova mato. Macchabandhā ca mahantaṃ macchaṃ labhitvā phāletvā vikkiṇanti. Taṃ pana dārakassa ānubhāvena aphāletvā sakalameva kājena haritvā sahassena demāti vadantā nagare vicariṃsu. Koci na gaṇhāti.
那时,在这城中有一个无子嗣、拥有八十亿财富的富豪家族。渔夫们把鱼抬到这户人家门口,人家问:「你们拿什么来卖?」他们答:「一个迦哈巴那钱。」于是他们付了一个迦哈巴那钱,买下了那条鱼。富豪的妻子平时对鱼从不留意,那天却亲自把鱼放在木板上剖开。通常,人们剖鱼是从腹部下刀,然而这位女主人却从鱼的背部剖开。当她剖开鱼背时,竟在鱼腹中看到一个金色的婴儿。她立刻大声喊道:「我在鱼腹里得到了一个儿子!」随即抱起婴儿,跑到丈夫那里。富豪一听,马上令人敲起大鼓昭告全城,然后抱着孩子去见国王,说道:「陛下,我从鱼腹中得到了这个孩子,该如何处置呢?」国王说:「此人真是有大福德,竟能在鱼腹中安然存活。你就好好养育他吧。」显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ pana nagare aputtakaṃ asītikoṭivibhavaṃ seṭṭhikulaṃ atthi, tassa dvāramūlaṃ patvā ‘‘kiṃ gahetvā dethā’’ti vuttā kahāpaṇanti āhaṃsu. Tehi kahāpaṇaṃ datvā gahito. Seṭṭhibhariyāpi aññesu divasesu macche na kelāyati, taṃ divasaṃ pana macchaṃ phalake ṭhapetvā sayameva phālesi. Macchañca nāma kucchito phālenti, sā pana piṭṭhito phālentī macchakucchiyaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ dārakaṃ disvā – ‘‘macchakucchiyaṃ me putto laddho’’ti nādaṃ naditvā dārakaṃ ādāya sāmikassa santikaṃ agamāsi. Seṭṭhi tāvadeva bheriṃ carāpetvā dārakaṃ ādāya rañño santikaṃ gantvā – ‘‘macchakucchiyaṃ me deva dārako laddho, kiṃ karomī’’ti āha. Puññavā esa, yo macchakucchiyaṃ arogo vasi, posehi nanti.
另一家听说「波罗奈城有一户富豪家在鱼腹中得到一个孩子」的消息,便赶了过去。当时,孩子的亲生母亲正在为孩子梳妆打扮、逗弄嬉戏。另一家的母亲一见到孩子,心想:「这孩子真是可爱!」便上前说明原委。对方说:「这是我的儿子」等等。问:「你从哪里得到他的?」答:「从鱼腹中。」另一方说:「不,这不是你的儿子,是我的儿子。」又问:「那你又从哪里得到他?」答:「我怀胎十月,把他怀在腹中。后来带他在河边玩耍时,鱼把他吞了。」对方说:「你的儿子大概被别的鱼吞了,而我这一个是从这条鱼腹中得到的。」于是两家都告到王宫。国王裁决道:「这位母亲怀胎十月,不能说不是母亲;而渔夫捕鱼时,从不会先取出鱼的内脏再去捕鱼,孩子确实是从鱼腹中得来的,因此也不能说另一位不是母亲。这孩子应当作为两家共同的继承人,由你们两家一起养育他吧。」于是两家共同养育这孩子。显示巴利原文
Assosi kho itaraṃ kulaṃ – ‘‘bārāṇasiyaṃ kira ekaṃ seṭṭhikulaṃ macchakucchiyaṃ dārakaṃ labhatī’’ti, te tattha agamaṃsu. Athassa mātā dārakaṃ alaṅkaritvā kīḷāpiyamānaṃ disvāva ‘‘manāpo vatāyaṃ dārako’’ti gantvā pavatiṃ ācikkhi. Itarā mayhaṃ puttotiādimāha. Kahaṃ te laddhoti? Macchakucchiyanti. No tuyhaṃ putto, mayhaṃ puttoti. Kahaṃ te laddhoti? Mayā dasamāse kucchiyā dhārito, atha naṃ nadiyā kīḷāpiyamānaṃ maccho gilīti. Tuyhaṃ putto aññena macchena gilito bhavissati, ayaṃ pana mayā macchakucchiyaṃ laddhoti, ubhopi rājakulaṃ agamaṃsu. Rājā āha – ‘‘ayaṃ dasa māse kucchiyā dhāritattā amātā kātuṃ na sakkā, macchaṃ gaṇhantāpi vakkayakanādīni bahi katvā gaṇhantā nāma natthīti macchakucchiyaṃ laddhattā ayampi amātā kātuṃ na sakkā, dārako ubhinnampi kulānaṃ dāyādo hotu, ubhopi naṃ jaggathā’’ti ubhopi jaggiṃsu.
他成年之后,两地在各自的城中为他建造了宫殿,并配备了歌舞伎乐。他轮番居住,每座城住四个月。住满四个月之后,众人便在‘桑伽他那’船上搭起华盖,让他与那些歌舞伎乐一同登船。他享着这些福报,乘船前往另一座城市。那一座城的居民又差遣歌舞伎乐半路出迎,将他簇拥着迎回本城的宫殿。原先那座城的伎乐便返回自己的城市。他在此居住四个月后,再依同样的方式回到另一座城。如此循环享乐,活到了八十岁。显示巴利原文
Viññutaṃ pattassa dvīsupi nagaresu pāsādaṃ kāretvā nāṭakāni paccupaṭṭhāpesuṃ. Ekekasmiṃ nagare cattāro cattāro māse vasati, ekasmiṃ nagare cattāro māse vuṭṭhassa saṅghāṭanāvāya maṇḍapaṃ kāretvā tattha naṃ saddhiṃ nāṭakāhi āropenti. So sampattiṃ anubhavamāno itaraṃ nagaraṃ gacchati. Taṃnagaravāsino nāṭakāni upaḍḍhamaggaṃ agamaṃsu. Te paccuggantvā taṃ parivāretvā attano pāsādaṃ nayanti. Itarāni nāṭakāni nivattitvā attano nagarameva gacchanti. Tattha cattāro māse vasitvā teneva niyāmena puna itaraṃ nagaraṃ gacchati. Evamassa sampattiṃ anubhavantassa asīti vassāni paripuṇṇāni.
那时,世尊游行来到波罗奈。他在世尊座下听闻正法,生起信心,便出家了。出家之后,他仅仅作为凡夫安住了七天,到第八天即连同无碍解一道证得了阿拉汉果。他就是这样有两家因缘的,因此被称为‘拔古喇’。显示巴利原文
Atha bhagavā cārikaṃ caramāno bārāṇasiṃ patto. So bhagavato santike dhammaṃ sutvā paṭiladdhasaddho pabbajito. Pabbajitvā sattāhameva puthujjano ahosi, aṭṭhame pana so saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇīti evamassa dve kulāni ahesuṃ. Tasmā bākuloti saṅkhaṃ agamāsīti.
“旧在家友伴”指的是他过去在俗时的朋友。这位朋友同样长寿,在他八十岁时前去探望已出家的长老。所谓“淫欲法”,指的是那个愚痴的裸形沙门所问的愚痴问题,并非佛陀教法中的用语。如今,他立足于长老所开示的法义,又用“那么这些呢?”来继续追问。显示巴利原文
Purāṇagihisahāyoti pubbe gihikāle sahāyo. Ayampi dīghāyukova theraṃ pabbajitaṃ passituṃ gacchanto asītime vasse gato. Methuno dhammoti bālo naggasamaṇako bālapucchaṃ pucchati, na sāsanavacanaṃ, idāni therena dinnanaye ṭhito imehi pana teti pucchi.
210 “尊者,凡是……”等词句,在所有问答场合中,都由结集法藏的长老们确定后安立。其中,仅仅想一生起,寻便成为区分业道的因素。然而长老说:“你们为何要分开安立?这两者同样都是区分业道的因素。”显示巴利原文
210.Yaṃpāyasmātiādīni padāni sabbavāresu dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi niyametvā ṭhapitāni. Tattha saññā uppannamattāva, vitakko kammapathabhedakoti . Thero panāha – ‘‘kasmā visuṃ karotha, ubhayampetaṃ kammapathabhedakamevā’’ti.
211 “居士衣”是指雨安居衣。“用刀”是指用刀片裁割。“以针”是指不记得拿起针来缝制的情形。“咖提那衣”是指咖提那衣所成之衣,咖提那衣也属于雨安居衣的范畴。因此,在那里说“不记得曾缝制”。显示巴利原文
211.Gahapaticīvaranti vassāvāsikaṃ cīvaraṃ. Satthenāti pipphalakena. Sūciyāti sūciṃ gahetvā sibbitabhāvaṃ na sarāmīti attho. Kathine cīvaranti kathinacīvaraṃ, kathinacīvarampi hi vassāvāsikagatikameva. Tasmā tattha ‘‘sibbitā nābhijānāmī’’ti āha.
那么,他这么长时间不受取居士衣,也不作裁剪缝制,袈裟又从何而来呢?来自两座城市。因为这位长老极为富有,他的儿女、孙辈等用细软布料制成袈裟,染好颜色,装入箱匣派人送来。在长老沐浴时,他们将袈裟放在浴处。长老便穿上这些袈裟,旧的则布施给前来出家的比丘们。穿上之后,也不再从事新的缝制,毫不积存。他唯是反复进入果定而住。坐满四个月后,袈裟表面会有些许垢秽,他们又以同样的方式送来。也有说每半个月更换一次。显示巴利原文
Ettakaṃ panassa kālaṃ gahapaticīvaraṃ asādiyantassa chindanasibbanādīni akarontassa kuto cīvaraṃ uppajjatīti. Dvīhi nagarehi. Thero hi mahāyasassī, tassa puttadhītaro nattapanattakā sukhumasāṭakehi cīvarāni kāretvā rajāpetvā samugge pakkhipitvā pahiṇanti. Therassa nhānakāle nhānakoṭṭhake ṭhapenti. Thero tāni nivāseti ceva pārupati ca, purāṇacīvarāni sampattapabbajitānaṃ deti. Thero tāni nivāsetvā ca pārupitvā ca navakammaṃ na karoti, kiñci āyūhanakammaṃ natthi. Phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā appetvā nisīdati. Catūsu māsesu pattesu lomakiliṭṭhāni honti, athassa puna teneva niyāmena pahiṇitvā denti. Aḍḍhamāse aḍḍhamāse parivattatītipi vadantiyeva.
对于这位福德广大、具大神足、于十万劫中圆满波罗蜜的长老来说,这并不稀奇。他就是阿育法王的亲教师,常受王家供养的尼拘陀长老,一日之内更换三次袈裟。他的三衣被置于象背,连同五百个香匣和五百个花鬘匣,清晨便已送到,午时与傍晚也是如此。据说那位大王一日也更换三次衣裳,每次都先问:“长老的袈裟送去了吗?”听到“送去了”之后,才自己更换。长老从不把布料打捆囤积,全都施与前来参学的同梵行者。据说当时整个赡部洲比丘僧团所用的袈裟,大多出自尼拘陀长老。显示巴利原文
Anacchariyañcetaṃ therassa mahāpuññassa mahābhiññassa satasahassakappe pūritapāramissa, asokadhammarañño kulūpako nigrodhatthero divasassa nikkhattuṃ cīvaraṃ parivattesi. Tassa hi ticīvaraṃ hatthikkhandhe ṭhapetvā pañcahi ca gandhasamuggasatehi pañcahi ca mālāsamuggasatehi saddhiṃ pātova āhariyittha, tathā divā ceva sāyañca. Rājā kira divasassa nikkhattuṃ sāṭake parivattento ‘‘therassa cīvaraṃ nīta’’nti pucchitvā ‘‘āma nīta’’nti sutvāva parivattesi. Theropi na bhaṇḍikaṃ bandhitvā ṭhapesi, sampattasabrahmacārīnaṃ adāsi. Tadā kira jambudīpe bhikkhusaṅghassa yebhuyyena nigrodhasseva santakaṃ cīvaraṃ ahosi.
“啊,但愿有人来邀请我!”——为什么这么说呢?因为心的不生起是沉重的,已生起(烦恼)的断除也是沉重的。心名为轻快转变者,因此不让它生起是沉重的,断除已生起的心念同样沉重。“内室”:依《大萨咖卢答夷经》(中部2.237)所说,从门槛起即名内室,这里是指尼姆巴水落下的地方。那么,这位长老的乞食是从哪里得来的呢?长老在两座城市很有名。每到一户门前,人们便接过他的钵,盛满各种美味食物后再还给他。他从得到食物的地方离去,但进餐的处所总是一定的。“随形好方面”:据说长老从未以取相的方式注视过女人。“为女人说法”:可以用五、六句话为女人说法;若被问问题,即使说上一千首偈颂也是许可的,但长老只做符合律制的事。因为一般亲近俗家的长老们常做这类事。“比丘尼住处”:就是比丘尼的住处。为了探病而去是可以的,但长老只做如法的事,各处都是这个道理。“用粉末”:指用憍赏弥药粉等。“身体护理”:如身体按摩之类。“使服务”:就是令人提供服侍。“挤牛奶量”:指握住母牛乳头挤出一次奶的那点时间量。显示巴利原文
Aho vata maṃ koci nimanteyyāti kiṃ pana cittassa anuppādanaṃ bhāriyaṃ, uppannassa pahānanti. Cittaṃ nāma lahukaparivattaṃ, tasmā anuppādanaṃ bhāriyaṃ , uppannassa pahānampi bhāriyameva . Antaraghareti mahāsakuludāyisutte (ma. ni. 2.237) indakhīlato paṭṭhāya antaragharaṃ nāma idha nimbodakapatanaṭṭhānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Kuto panassa bhikkhā uppajjitthāti. Thero dvīsu nagaresu abhiññāto, gehadvāraṃ āgatassevassa pattaṃ gahetvā nānārasabhojanassa pūretvā denti. So laddhaṭṭhānato nivattati, bhattakiccakaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ panassa nibaddhameva ahosi. Anubyañjanasoti therena kira rūpe nimittaṃ gahetvā mātugāmo na olokitapubbo. Mātugāmassa dhammanti mātugāmassa chappañcavācāhi dhammaṃ desetuṃ vaṭṭati, pañhaṃ puṭṭhena gāthāsahassampi vattuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Thero pana kappiyameva na akāsi. Yebhuyyena hi kulūpakatherānametaṃ kammaṃ hoti. Bhikkhunupassayanti bhikkhuniupassayaṃ. Taṃ pana gilānapucchakena gantuṃ vaṭṭati, thero pana kappiyameva na akāsi. Esa nayo sabbattha. Cuṇṇenāti kosambacuṇṇādinā. Gattaparikammeti sarīrasambāhanakamme. Vicāritāti payojayitā. Gaddūhanamattanti gāviṃ thane gahetvā ekaṃ khīrabinduṃ dūhanakālamattampi.
是什么因缘使得长老没有病呢?据说,当莲花上世尊由十万比丘围绕游化时,雪山中的毒树开花了。十万比丘因此患上了草花病。那时,长老是一位有神通的苦行者,他正于空中行走,望见比丘僧团后便降落下来,询问病情,然后从雪山采来药给他们。仅仅嗅闻一下,病就平息了。在迦叶正自觉佛的时代,他也在开始播种的那天暂停播种,为比丘僧团建造了供使用的火房和厕所,并安排了医药服务。由这样的业,他成为无病之人。不过,他是一位坚定的常坐苦行者和坚定的林中住者,所以才会说“我不记得曾经倚靠过什么倚靠物”等。显示巴利原文
Kena pana kāraṇena thero nirābādho ahosi. Padumuttare kira bhagavati satasahassabhikkhuparivāre cārikaṃ caramāne himavati visarukkhā pupphiṃsu. Bhikkhusatasahassānampi tiṇapupphakarogo uppajjati. Thero tasmiṃ samaye iddhimā tāpaso hoti, so ākāsena gacchanto bhikkhusaṅghaṃ disvā otaritvā rogaṃ pucchitvā himavantato osadhaṃ āharitvā adāsi. Upasiṅghanamatteneva rogo vūpasami. Kassapasammāsambuddhakālepi paṭhamavappadivase vappaṃ ṭhapetvā bhikkhusaṅghassa paribhogaṃ aggisālañceva vaccakuṭiñca kāretvā bhikkhusaṅghassa bhesajjavattaṃ nibandhi, iminā kammena nirābādho ahosi. Ukkaṭṭhanesajjiko panesa ukkaṭṭhāraññako ca tasmā ‘‘nābhijānāmi apassenakaṃ apassayitā’’tiādimāha.
“有烦恼”:即与烦恼俱行。“智生起”:向未受具足戒者宣说其他智是不允许的。长老为何宣说了呢?长老并未说“我是阿拉汉”,而是说“智生起”。况且,长老本就以阿拉汉的身份为人所知,所以如此宣说。显示巴利原文
Saraṇoti sakileso. Aññā udapādīti anupasampannassa aññaṃ byākātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Thero kasmā byākāsi? Na thero ahaṃ arahāti āha, aññā udapādīti panāha. Apica thero arahāti pākaṭo, tasmā evamāha.
212 “出家”:长老并未亲自为人剃度出家,也未亲自为人授具足戒,而是让其他比丘这样做了。“拿着钥匙”:即拿着门栓。显示巴利原文
212.Pabbajjanti thero sayaṃ neva pabbājesi, na upasampādesi aññehi pana bhikkhūhi evaṃ kārāpesi. Avāpuraṇaṃ ādāyāti kuñcikaṃ gahetvā.
“坐着般涅槃者”:他这样想:“我活着时,未曾成为其他比丘的负担;我般涅槃后,身体也不要成为比丘僧团的障碍。”于是入火界定而般涅槃。火焰从身体中升起,皮、肉、血如同酥油般燃烧殆尽,只留下类似素馨花蕾般的舍利。显示巴利原文
Nisinnakovaparinibbāyīti ahaṃ dharamānopi na aññassa bhikkhussa bhāro ahosiṃ, parinibbutassāpi me sarīraṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa palibodho mā ahosīti tejodhātuṃ samāpajjitvā parinibbāyi. Sarīrato jālā uṭṭhahi, chavimaṃsalohitaṃ sappi viya jhāyamānaṃ parikkhayaṃ gataṃ, sumanamakulasadisā dhātuyova avasesiṃsu. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva. Idaṃ pana suttaṃ dutiyasaṅgahe saṅgītanti.
5. 调御地经注释显示巴利原文
5. Dantabhūmisuttavaṇṇanā
213 这是《调御地经》中的“如是我闻”一节。其中,“阿兰若小屋”:指在竹林精舍一处僻静之地,为精勤修行的比丘们所建造的坐卧处。“王子”:指频婆娑罗王的亲生儿子。显示巴利原文
213.Evaṃme sutanti dantabhūmisuttaṃ. Tattha araññakuṭikāyanti tasseva veḷuvanassa ekasmiṃ vivittaṭṭhāne padhānakammikānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ atthāya katasenāsane. Rājakumāroti bimbisārassa putto orasako.
“Phuseyyā”意为“获得”。“心一境性”:指如此修行者,即名为获得等至,获得禅那——这是我听闻到的,他这样说。“疲劳”指身体的疲劳。“恼害”即指前述那种疲劳。“应住于己分”:意思是应安住于自己无知的范围之中。显示巴利原文
Phuseyyāti labheyya. Ekaggatanti evaṃ paṭipanno samāpattiṃ nāma labhati, jhānaṃ nāma labhatīti idaṃ mayā sutanti vadati. Kilamathoti kāyakilamatho. Vihesāti sveva kilamatho vutto. Yathāsake tiṭṭheyyāsīti attano ajānanakoṭṭhāseyeva tiṭṭheyyāsīti.
214 “他解说道”:即他这样讲述:“心一境性是这样获得的,等至是这样产生的。”他引导修行者达到安止定与近行定后,讲述了单一遍的预备作意。“开示”意为阐明、说明。显示巴利原文
214.Desesīti cittekaggataṃ nāma evaṃ labhati, samāpattiṃ evaṃ nibbattetīti appanāupacāraṃ pāpetvā ekakasiṇaparikammaṃ kathesi. Pavedetvāti pakāsetvā.
“应以出离而了知”的意思是:应当由离欲的功德来了知。此句的意旨为:安住于离欲功德的人,应当了知所谓的“一境性”。其余的词皆是其同义词。“受用欲者”:即正在受用两种欲的人。显示巴利原文
Nekkhammena ñātabbanti kāmato nissaṭaguṇena ñātabbaṃ. Kāmato nissaṭaguṇe ṭhitena puggalena ekaggaṃ nāma jānitabbanti adhippāyenetaṃ vuttaṃ . Sesāni tasseva vevacanāni. Kāmeparibhuñjantoti duvidhepi kāme bhuñjamāno.
215 “应调御的象、应调御的马、应调御的牛”:此处,应视缺乏心一境性之人,如同未调御的象等;而具足心一境性之人,则如同已调御的象等。正如未调御的象等,不能舍弃轭具、保持端直的姿态,既不能以已调御的方式行走,也不能以象牙抵达应达之处;同样地,缺乏心一境性的人,便不能生起那些具足心一境性者所产生的功德,或到达应到的境地。显示巴利原文
215.Hatthidammā vā assadammā vā godammā vāti ettha adantahatthidammādayo viya cittekaggarahitā puggalā daṭṭhabbā. Dantahatthiādayo viya cittekaggasampannā. Yathā adantahatthidammādayo kūṭākāraṃ akatvā dhuraṃ achaḍḍetvā dantagamanaṃ vā gantuṃ, dantehi vā pattabbaṃ bhūmiṃ pāpuṇituṃ na sakkonti, evameva cittekaggarahitā sampannacittekaggehi nibbattitaguṇaṃ vā nibbattetuṃ pattabhūmiṃ vā pāpuṇituṃ na sakkonti.
216 “以手牵手”:指以手握持他人之手。显示巴利原文
216.Hatthavilaṅghakenāti hatthena hatthaṃ gahetvā.
“应见者”:指适合被看到的。“被覆者”:指被遮蔽的。“被障者”:指被障碍的。“被笼罩者”:指被包裹的。显示巴利原文
Daṭṭheyyanti passitabbayuttakaṃ. Āvutoti āvarito. Nivutoti nivārito. Ophuṭoti onaddho.
217 “象林生活者”:在《象迹譬喻经》等经典中,于象林里游行的男子被称为“象林生活者”。此处指精通调象、能够捕捉大象的人。“超越看见”即看见。“于此贪着”:指对此所生起的贪着。“心之意图”:指心中奔驰的意图。“为劝导人们喜爱戒”:在这里,当大象被男人、女人、男孩、女孩抓住鼻子等处逗弄时,如果它依然安适、无动于衷,那时便可以说它受持了人们所喜爱的戒。显示巴利原文
217.Nāgavanikanti hatthipadopame (ma. ni. 1.288 ādayo) nāgavanacarako puriso ‘‘nāgavaniko’’ti vutto, idha hatthisikkhāya kusalo hatthiṃ gahetuṃ samattho. Atipassitvāti disvā. Etthagedhāti etasmiṃ pavattagedhā. Sarasaṅkappānanti dhāvanasaṅkappānaṃ. Manussakantesu sīlesu samādapanāyāti ettha yadā nāgo itthipurisehi kumārakumārikāhi soṇḍādīsu gahetvā upakeḷayamāno vikāraṃ na karoti sukhāyati, tadānena manussakantāni sīlāni samādinnāni nāma honti.
“可爱的话语”:如“孩子,国王对你很满意,将会把你安置在吉祥象的位置,你将得到配得上国王的饮食等”,这种令象爱乐的话语。“欲闻”:指它想听闻那样的可爱话语。“草、饲料和水”:即草、饲料与水;其中,“草、饲料”是指用以喂食的草料,即是应吃的食物。显示巴利原文
Pemanīyāti tāta rājā te pasanno maṅgalahatthiṭṭhāneva ṭhapessati, rājārahāni bhojanādīni labhissasīti evarūpī nāgehi piyāpitabbā kathā. Sussūsatīti taṃ pemanīyakathaṃ sotukāmo hoti. Tiṇaghāsodakanti tiṇaghāsañceva udakañca, tiṇaghāsanti ghāsitabbaṃ tiṇaṃ, khāditabbanti attho.
「鼓」指小鼓。「已舍一切弯曲、过失,已除杂染者」意指已断除了一切弯曲与过失,并去除了杂染。「如肢体之螺贝」指成为与肢体等同的存在。显示巴利原文
Paṇavoti ḍiṇḍimo. Sabbavaṅkadosanihitaninnītakasāvoti nihitasabbavaṅkadoso ceva apanītakasāvo ca. Aṅganteva saṅkhaṃ gacchatīti aṅgasamo hoti.
219 「依家之戒」指依止于五欲功德的戒。「正理」指八支圣道。显示巴利原文
219.Gehasitasīlānanti pañcakāmaguṇanissitasīlānaṃ. Ñāyassāti aṭṭhaṅgikamaggassa.
222 「未调伏死」是指:国王那头年老的大象,在未调伏的状态中死去、命终,这便称为“未调伏死”。此处义为:以未调伏的方式死去,即称为行未调伏死。此理通于一切处。其余的内容十分浅显易懂。显示巴利原文
222.Adantamaraṇaṃ mahallako rañño nāgo kālaṅkatoti rañño mahallako nāgo adantamaraṇaṃ mato kālaṃ kato hoti, adantamaraṇaṃ kālaṃkiriyaṃ nāma kariyatīti ayamettha attho. Esa nayo sabbattha. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti.
第六《浮弥佐经》的注释。显示巴利原文
6. Bhūmijasuttavaṇṇanā
223 “如是我闻”等经文,即《浮弥佐经》。其中,“浮弥佐”尊者乃嘉亚些那王子的舅父。“有期望与无期望”指时而有所期望,时而没有期望。“用自己的钵饭”意思是:依常行乞食所得,以自钵中已备的饭食供养。其余各处文义显明,易于理解。显示巴利原文
223.Evaṃme sutanti bhūmijasuttaṃ. Tattha bhūmijoti ayaṃ thero jayasenarājakumārassa mātulo. Āsañca anāsañcāti kālena āsaṃ kālena anāsaṃ. Sakenathālipākenāti pakatipavattāya bhikkhāya attano niṭṭhitabhattatopi bhattena parivisi. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
第七《阿那律经》的解释显示巴利原文
7. Anuruddhasuttavaṇṇanā
230 “如是我闻”等,此为《阿那律经》。其中,“他们这样说”指当时那位近事男身体不适,他们便前去如此说。“无谬”即没有错失。“同一义”是说,所谓“无量”或“广大”,所指无非就是禅那,亦即心一境性本身;他是针对此义而说的。显示巴利原文
230.Evaṃme sutanti anuruddhasuttaṃ. Tattha evamāhaṃsūti tassa upāsakassa aphāsukakālo ahosi, tadā upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṃsu. Apaṇṇakanti avirādhitaṃ. Ekatthāti appamāṇāti vā mahaggatāti vā jhānameva cittekaggatāyeva evaṃ vuccatīti imaṃ sandhāya evamāha.
231 “凡所遍满一棵树下为广大”等,意为:以遍相覆盖一棵树下量度之处,于彼遍相中,遍满并胜解广大禅那而住。于“广大”中,他并无“这是广大”的作意,唯依广大禅那的现行而说。此理普适于一切处。“居士,以此方式”指以此因缘。此处,称为“无量”的梵住之相不增长,不会出现“揭除”;那些禅那不是神通或灭尽定的基础,但可作为观的基础、轮回的基础与投生的基础。而称为“广大”的遍禅那之相则会增长,会出现“揭除”,有超越上地,是神通的基础、灭尽定的基础、轮回的基础与投生的基础。因此,这些法义不同,所谓“无量”与“广大”,其名称与词句亦各各相异。显示巴利原文
231.Yāvatāekaṃ rukkhamūlaṃ mahaggatanti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharatīti ekarukkhamūlapamāṇaṭṭhānaṃ kasiṇanimittena ottharitvā tasmiṃ kasiṇanimitte mahaggatajjhānaṃ pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Mahaggatanti panassa ābhogo natthi, kevalaṃ mahaggatajjhānapavattivasena panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha. Iminā kho etaṃ gahapati pariyāyenāti iminā kāraṇena. Ettha hi appamāṇāti vuttānaṃ brahmavihārānaṃ nimittaṃ na vaḍḍhati, ugghāṭanaṃ na jāyati, tāni jhānāni abhiññānaṃ vā nirodhassa vā pādakāni na honti, vipassanāpādakāni pana vaṭṭapādakāni bhavokkamanāni ca honti. ‘‘Mahaggatā’’ti vuttānaṃ pana kasiṇajjhānānaṃ nimittaṃ vaḍḍhati, ugghāṭanaṃ jāyati, samatikkamā honti, abhiññāpādakāni nirodhapādakāni vaṭṭapādakāni bhavokkamanāni ca honti. Evamime dhammā nānatthā, appamāṇā mahaggatāti evaṃ nānābyañjanā ca.
232 “少光天”:指在遍满之后这样作意:“(有)少光天”,为投生少光天而修习禅那,故如此说。此法通于一切处。少光天的光明,有染污的,也有清净的;无量光天的光明,有染污的,也有清净的。这是怎样的呢?如果以筛子或碗的大小来准备遍相,修习等至之后,未在五种方式上修习自在,由于对立之法未能善加清净,便只受用微弱的等至,住于不娴熟的禅那,死后投生少光天,他的光明既微小又染污。如果在五种方式上修习自在,由于对立之法已善加清净,便受用极为清净的等至,住于娴熟的禅那,死后投生少光天,他的光明虽小,却是清净的。如此,少光天的光明有染污的,也有清净的。如果以广大的遍相来准备,修习等至,并在五种方式上修习自在,如前所述,应当知道。如此,无量光天的光明有染污的,也有清净的。显示巴利原文
232. Idāni mahaggatasamāpattito nīharitvā bhavūpapattikāraṇaṃ dassento catasso kho imātiādimāha. Parittābhāti pharitvā jānantassa ayamābhogo atthi, parittābhesu pana devesu nibbattikāraṇaṃ jhānaṃ bhāvento evaṃ vutto. Esa nayo sabbattha. Parittābhā siyā saṃkiliṭṭhābhā honti siyā parisuddhābhā, appamāṇābhā siyā saṃkiliṭṭhābhā honti siyā parisuddhābhā. Kathaṃ? Suppamatte vā sarāvamatte vā kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā samāpattiṃ nibbattetvā pañcahākārehi āciṇṇavasibhāvo paccanīkadhammānaṃ suṭṭhu aparisodhitattā dubbalameva samāpattiṃ vaḷañjitvā appaguṇajjhāne ṭhito kālaṃ katvā parittābhesu nibbattati, vaṇṇo panassa paritto ceva hoti saṃkiliṭṭho ca. Pañcahi panākārehi āciṇṇavasibhāvo paccanīkadhammānaṃ suṭṭhu parisodhitattā suvisuddhaṃ samāpattiṃ vaḷañjitvā paguṇajjhāne ṭhito kālaṃ katvā parittābhesu nibbattati, vaṇṇo panassa paritto ceva hoti parisuddho ca. Evaṃ parittābhā siyā saṃkiliṭṭhābhā honti siyā parisuddhābhā. Kasiṇe pana vipulaparikammaṃ katvā samāpattiṃ nibbattetvā pañcahākārehi āciṇṇavasibhāvoti sabbaṃ purimasadisameva veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ appamāṇābhā siyā saṃkiliṭṭhābhā honti siyā parisuddhābhāti.
“颜色的不同”:指身体颜色的差异。“而非光的不同”:指光明显现时,不见差异。“火焰的不同”:指火焰依长短、粗细而有的差异。显示巴利原文
Vaṇṇanānattanti sarīravaṇṇassa nānattaṃ. No ca ābhānānattanti āloke nānattaṃ na paññāyati. Accinānattanti dīgharassaaṇuthūlavasena acciyā nānattaṃ.
“无论何处”:指园林、天宫、如意树、河岸、池塘岸边等任何处所。“定居”:谓居住。“喜悦”:谓欢喜而不厌倦。“食担”:指盛着粥、饭、油、糖浆、鱼、肉等的任何担子。亦有读作“Kācena”者,义同。“篮”:指筐。“就在那里”:从酥油、蜂蜜、糖浆等容易获得的地方,被带往盐、臭鱼等丰富之处时,心中不生起这样的念头:“我们先前住的处所舒适,我们在那里快乐地生活,这里的盐不会困扰我们,臭鱼的气味不会令我们头痛。”于是便一直住于彼处,心生欢喜。显示巴利原文
Yattha yatthāti uyyānavimānakapparukkhanadītīrapokkharaṇītīresu yattha yattha. Abhinivisantīti vasanti. Abhiramantīti ramanti na ukkaṇṭhanti. Kājenāti yāgubhattatelaphāṇitamacchamaṃsakājesu yena kenaci kājena. ‘‘Kācenāti’’pi pāṭho, ayameva attho. Piṭakenāti pacchiyā. Tattha tatthevāti sappimadhuphāṇitādīnaṃ sulabhaṭṭhānato loṇapūtimacchādīnaṃ ussannaṭṭhānaṃ nītā ‘‘pubbe amhākaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ phāsukaṃ, tattha sukhaṃ vasimhā, idha loṇaṃ vā no bādhati pūtimacchagandho vā sīsarogaṃ uppādetī’’ti evaṃ cittaṃ anuppādetvā tattha tattheva ramanti.
234 “光”指具足光辉。“以彼支分”指以生于彼处之支分,即生于彼处之因。今为问彼因,而说:“尊者,究竟是什么原因……”等。显示巴利原文
234.Ābhāti ābhāsampannā. Tadaṅgenāti tassā bhavūpapattiyā aṅgena, bhavūpapattikāraṇenāti attho. Idāni taṃ kāraṇaṃ pucchanto ko nu kho, bhantetiādimāha.
“身粗重”指身体陷入懈怠的状态。“在燃烧的”指正在炽燃的。显示巴利原文
Kāyaduṭṭhullanti kāyālasiyabhāvo. Jhāyatoti jalato.
235 “我确实历经长时”指相传长老在圆满诸波罗蜜时,出家为仙人修行,证得定境后,于梵天界连续不断地获得三百个自体,他是针对此事而言。对此也有经文提及——显示巴利原文
235.Dīgharattaṃ kho meti thero kira pāramiyo pūrento isipabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā samāpattiṃ nibbattetvā nirantaraṃ tīṇi attabhāvasatāni brahmaloke paṭilabhi, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ āha. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
我出家行此仙人修行以来,不曾间断,已经历了整整三百世;
寻求无为法,这是我从前流转轮回中所行之道。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Avokiṇṇaṃ tīṇi sataṃ, yaṃ pabbajiṃ isipabbajjaṃ; Asaṅkhataṃ gavesanto, pubbe sañcaritaṃ mama’’nti.
其他各处,意义皆已明了。显示巴利原文
Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
八、《随烦恼经》注疏显示巴利原文
8. Upakkilesasuttavaṇṇanā
236 “如是我闻”等,即指《随烦恼经》。其中,“他这样说”,既非出于分裂僧团之意,亦非为了取悦他人。而是世尊心中这样思惟:“这些比丘听了我的话,便不会再固执退转。诸佛确为利益众生、心怀悲悯者,世尊必定会为他们说出一番令其退转的道理。他们闻后将放弃争执,从而获得安住轻利。”因此,那位比丘才说出“尊者,在此”这番话。在“不要争斗”等句中,当知省略了“作”字,应理解为“不要作争斗”,如此把握其义。“某位”:据说,此比丘是为了世尊的利益。他心中的想法是:“这些比丘被怒火冲昏了头,根本听不进导师的话,唯愿世尊莫因教导他们而自疲累。”故有此说。显示巴利原文
236.Evaṃme sutanti upakkilesasuttaṃ. Tattha etadavocāti neva bhedādhippāyena na piyakamyatāya, atha khvāssa etadahosi – ‘‘ime bhikkhū mama vacanaṃ gahetvā na oramissanti, buddhā ca nāma hitānukampakā, addhā nesaṃ bhagavā ekaṃ kāraṇaṃ kathessati, taṃ sutvā ete oramissanti, tato tesaṃ phāsuvihāro bhavissatī’’ti. Tasmā etaṃ ‘‘idha, bhante’’tiādivacanamavoca. Mā bhaṇḍanantiādīsu ‘‘akatthā’’ti pāṭhasesaṃ gahetvā ‘‘mā bhaṇḍanaṃ akatthā’’ti evaṃ attho daṭṭhabbo. Aññataroti so kira bhikkhu bhagavato atthakāmo, ayaṃ kirassa adhippāyo – ‘‘ime bhikkhū kodhābhibhūtā satthu vacanaṃ na gaṇhanti, mā bhagavā ete ovadanto kilamī’’ti, tasmā evamāha.
“为乞食而入”:并不仅仅是走进去而已,他还决意:“即使那些没见到我的人,也让他们见到我吧。”为何如此决意?为调伏诸比丘故。当时,世尊拒绝接受团食供养,在说了“众人喧杂,等同凡夫”等偈颂后,便离开憍赏弥,前往巴拉卡洛那卡拉村。又从那里到了东竹林,其后进入巴利雷亚森林丛,由巴利雷亚象王供养,在那里住了三个月。城中居民心想:“导师去了寺院,我们去听法吧。”于是手执香华来到寺院,问:“尊者,导师在哪里?”比丘们回答:“你们何处能见到导师?导师原为‘令这些比丘和合’而来,但在无法让他们和合的情况下,便离开了。”居民们说:“纵使我们耗费百千金钱,也无法将导师请回。世尊本不请自来。就因为这些比丘,害我们错失了在导师尊前闻法的机会。这些比丘是为导师而出家的,如今导师亲自出面调解和合,他们都不愿和合,还会听从谁呢?够了,不应再给他们任何食物了。”于是,全城的人都决意如此惩罚他们。第二天,那些比丘遍城托钵乞食,竟连一匙之食也未获,只得返回寺院。显示巴利原文
Piṇḍāya pāvisīti na kevalaṃ pāvisi, yenapi janena na diṭṭho, so maṃ passatūtipi adhiṭṭhāsi. Kimatthaṃ adhiṭṭhāsīti? Tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ damanatthaṃ. Bhagavā hi tadā piṇḍapātappaṭikkanto ‘‘puthusaddo samajano’’tiādigāthā bhāsitvā kosambito bālakaloṇakāragāmaṃ gato. Tato pācīnavaṃsadāyaṃ, tato pālileyyakavanasaṇḍaṃ gantvā pālileyyahatthināgena upaṭṭhahiyamāno temāsaṃ vasi. Nagaravāsinopi – ‘‘satthā vihāraṃ gato, gacchāma dhammassavanāyā’’ti gandhapupphahatthā vihāraṃ gantvā ‘‘kahaṃ, bhante, satthā’’ti pucchiṃsu. ‘‘Kahaṃ tumhe satthāraṃ dakkhatha, satthā ‘ime bhikkhū samagge karissāmī’ti āgato, samagge kātuṃ asakkonto nikkhamitvā gato’’ti. ‘‘Mayaṃ satampi sahassampi datvā satthāraṃ ānetuṃ na sakkoma, so no ayācito sayameva āgato, mayaṃ ime bhikkhū nissāya satthu sammukhā dhammakathaṃ sotuṃ na labhimhā. Ime satthāraṃ uddissa pabbajitā, tasmimpi sāmaggiṃ karonte samaggā na jātā, kassāññassa vacanaṃ karissanti. Alaṃ na imesaṃ bhikkhā dātabbā’’ti sakalanagare daṇḍaṃ ṭhapayiṃsu. Te punadivase sakalanagaraṃ piṇḍāya caritvā kaṭacchumattampi bhikkhaṃ alabhitvā vihāraṃ āgamaṃsu. Upāsakāpi te puna āhaṃsu – ‘‘yāva satthāraṃ na khamāpetha, tāva vo tameva daṇḍakamma’’nti. Te ‘‘satthāraṃ khamāpessāmā’’ti bhagavati sāvatthiyaṃ anuppatte tattha agamaṃsu. Satthā tesaṃ aṭṭhārasa bhedakaravatthūni desesīti ayamettha pāḷimuttakakathā.
237 今于“众人喧杂”等偈颂中,“众人喧杂”指有众多、巨大的声音。“等同凡夫”:谓全然相同、一类之人。整句意谓:所有这些制造争斗之人,因其声从四面八方发出,故既喧杂又皆是一类。“彼处无任何愚者作如是念”:意谓于他们之中,无有一人作“我是愚者”之想,悉皆自许为智者。“亦不认为他人更差”:即无有一人自视为愚;更进而言之,于僧团濒临分裂之际,亦无任何一人会想及他因,即不会想到“是因我故,僧团分裂”。此即其义。显示巴利原文
237. Idāni puthusaddotiādigāthāsu puthu mahāsaddo assāti puthusaddo. Samajanoti samāno ekasadiso jano, sabbovāyaṃ bhaṇḍanakārakajano samantato saddaniccharaṇena puthusaddo ceva sadiso cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Na bālo koci maññathāti tatra koci ekopi ahaṃ bāloti na maññati, sabbepi paṇḍitamāninoyeva. Nāññaṃ bhiyyo amaññarunti koci ekopi ahaṃ bāloti na ca maññi, bhiyyo ca saṅghasmiṃ bhijjamāne aññampi ekaṃ ‘‘mayhaṃ kāraṇā saṅgho bhijjatī’’ti idaṃ kāraṇaṃ na maññīti attho.
“失念者”:即忘失正念之人。“言语行境之说者”:此处将r音作了缩短;他们唯以言语为行境,而非以念处为行境,且是好说者。如何好说?他们想张多大嘴就张多大嘴,愿张到多大便伸到多大,伸开后便说,无一因敬重僧团而收摄口舌者——这是其含义。“被引导至此”:即被诤论引导至这无惭无愧的状态。“他们不知、不识”:他们不知“这是有过失的”,也不识“这样说是有罪过的”。显示巴利原文
Parimuṭṭhāti muṭṭhassatino. Vācāgocarabhāṇinoti rākārassa rassādeso kato; vācāgocarāva , na satipaṭṭhānagocarā, bhāṇino ca, kathaṃ bhāṇino? Yāvicchanti mukhāyāmaṃ, yāva mukhaṃ pasāretuṃ icchanti, tāva pasāretvā bhāṇino, ekopi saṅghagāravena mukhasaṅkocanaṃ na karotīti attho. Yena nītāti yena kalahena imaṃ nillajjabhāvaṃ nītā. Na taṃ vidū na taṃ jānanti ‘‘evaṃ sādīnavo aya’’nti.
“若有人怨恨”:即对于“他骂我”等相状而怀恨。“古旧”:即久远、古老的。显示巴利原文
Ye ca taṃ upanayhantīti taṃ akkocchi mantiādikaṃ ākāraṃ ye upanayhanti. Sanantanoti porāṇo.
“其他人”:除智者以外,其余那些制造争吵者称为其他人。他们在僧团中制造诤论时,并不知“我们被抑制、被束缚,恒常不断地走向死亡”。“其中知者”:其中那些智者则了知“我们走向死亡”。于是诤论平息:因这般了知,他们生起如理作意,为了平息那些诤论与争吵而修习,故得平息。显示巴利原文
Pareti paṇḍite ṭhapetvā tato aññe bhaṇḍanakārakā pare nāma. Te ettha saṅghamajjhe kalahaṃ karontā ‘‘mayaṃ yamāmase upayamāma nassāma satataṃ samitaṃ maccusantikaṃ gacchāmā’’ti na jānanti. Ye ca tattha vijānantīti ye ca tattha paṇḍitā ‘‘mayaṃ maccuno samīpaṃ gacchāmā’’ti vijānanti. Tato sammanti medhagāti evañhi te jānantā yonisomanasikāraṃ uppādetvā medhagānaṃ kalahānaṃ vūpasamāya paṭipajjanti.
“骨未断”:这首偈颂出自《本生经》,是就梵授王与长寿王子而说的。此处的意思是:即使是那样长久怀恨的人,也有和合的时候,为什么你们却没有呢?对于你们来说,既没有父母的骨头被对方打断,也没有生命被夺走,更没有牛马与财产被抢走。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhicchinnāti ayaṃ gāthā jātake (jā. 1.9.16) āgatā, brahmadattañca dīghāvukumārañca sandhāya vuttā. Ayañhettha attho – tesampi tathā pavattaverānaṃ hoti saṅgati, kasmā tumhākaṃ na hoti, yesaṃ vo neva mātāpitūnaṃ aṭṭhīni chinnāni, na pāṇā haṭā na gavāssadhanāni haṭānīti.
“若能得”等偈颂,是为了阐明善友与恶友的优劣而说的。“战胜一切危难”是指:克服了明显的危难和隐藏的危难之后,应当满怀欢喜、保持正念,与他同行。显示巴利原文
Sacelabhethātiādigāthā paṇḍitasahāyassa ca bālasahāyassa ca vaṇṇāvaṇṇadīpanatthaṃ vuttā. Abhibhuyya sabbāni parissayānīti pākaṭaparissaye ca paṭicchannaparissaye ca abhibhavitvā tena saddhiṃ attamano satimā careyyāti.
“犹如国王舍弃已征服的国土”:意为如同大众王与降敌大王舍弃自己所征服的国土,独自游历那样,也应如此游历。“犹如林中的摩登伽象,名为龙”:“摩登伽”即林中的象,“龙”是对大的称呼。如同那奉养母亲的摩登伽象在林中独自行走、不造恶,又如同巴利雷亚象那样,应当独自行走、不造恶——这就是此处所说的含义。显示巴利原文
Rājāva raṭṭhaṃ vijitanti yathā attano vijitaraṭṭhaṃ mahājanakarājā ca arindamamahārājā ca pahāya ekakā vicariṃsu, evaṃ vicareyyāti attho. Mātaṅgaraññeva nāgoti mātaṅgo araññe nāgova. Mātaṅgoti hatthi vuccati. Nāgoti mahantādhivacanametaṃ. Yathā hi mātuposako mātaṅganāgo araññe eko cari, na ca pāpāni akāsi, yathā ca pālileyyako, evaṃ eko care, na ca pāpāni kayirāti vuttaṃ hoti.
238 “Bālakaloṇakāragāma”是居士优波离的受用村落。“他便前往”:为何前往?据说他见到僧团中的过患,生起了想见独住比丘的愿望,因此就像受寒冷等所苦而寻求温暖等那样,前往那里。“以法语”:指关于独住利益的法语。他为何前往东竹林?据说他见到那些争吵之人有过患,生起了想见和合而住之比丘们的愿望,因此就像受寒冷等所苦而寻求温暖等那样,前往那里。“尊者阿那律”等,如前所述。显示巴利原文
238.Bālakaloṇakāragāmoti upāligahapatissa bhogagāmo. Tenupasaṅkamīti kasmā upasaṅkami? Gaṇe kirassa ādīnavaṃ disvā ekavihāriṃ bhikkhuṃ passitukāmatā udapādi, tasmā sītādīhi pīḷito uṇhādīni patthayamāno viya upasaṅkami. Dhammiyā kathāyāti ekībhāve ānisaṃsappaṭisaṃyuttāya. Yena pācīnavaṃsadāyo, tattha kasmā upasaṅkami? Kalahakārake kirassa diṭṭhādīnavattā samaggavāsino bhikkhū passitukāmatā udapādi, tasmā sītādīhi pīḷito uṇhādīni patthayamāno viya tattha upasaṅkami. Āyasmā ca anuruddhotiādi vuttanayameva.
241 “你们是否有”:若是世尊,会依后面的问题问出世间法,但长老们并未证得出世间法,问那个并不合适,因此他只问准备阶段所生的光明。“我们了知光明”:我们了知准备阶段的光明。“以及见了诸色”:我们也了知以天眼见到诸色。“而我们却不通达那个相”:我们却不知那个原因——什么因缘令我们的光明与见色隐没。显示巴利原文
241.Atthi pana voti pacchimapucchāya lokuttaradhammaṃ puccheyya. So pana therānaṃ natthi, tasmā taṃ pucchituṃ na yuttanti parikammobhāsaṃ pucchati. Obhāsañceva sañjānāmāti parikammobhāsaṃ sañjānāma. Dassanañca rūpānanti dibbacakkhunā rūpadassanañca sañjānāma. Tañca nimittaṃ nappaṭivijjhāmāti tañca kāraṇaṃ na jānāma, yena no obhāso ca rūpadassanañca antaradhāyati.
“然而,阿那律,你们应当通达那个相”:你们应当了知那个原因。“我也同样”:阿那律,你们为何不困惑?我往昔也曾被这十一种随烦恼所扰乱。为了说明这个道理,世尊开始此教导。在“我生起疑”等处:菩萨令光明增长,以天眼见到种种色之后,生起“这到底是什么?”的疑;于是近行定退失,准备阶段的光明也隐没,以天眼也不见色了。“不作意”:正在见色的他生起疑后,心想“现在我什么都不作意了”,于是生起了不作意。显示巴利原文
Taṃ kho pana vo anuruddhā nimittaṃ paṭivijjhitabbanti taṃ vo kāraṇaṃ jānitabbaṃ. Ahampi sudanti anuruddhā tumhe kiṃ na āḷulessanti, ahampi imehi ekādasahi upakkilesehi āḷulitapubboti dassetuṃ imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Vicikicchā kho metiādīsu mahāsattassa ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dibbacakkhunā nānāvidhāni rūpāni disvā ‘‘idaṃ kho ki’’nti vicikicchā udapādi. Samādhi cavīti parikammasamādhi cavi. Obhāsoti parikammobhāsopi antaradhāyi, dibbacakkhunāpi rūpaṃ na passi. Amanasikāroti rūpāni passato vicikicchā uppajjati, idāni kiñci na manasikarissāmīti amanasikāro udapādi.
“昏沉睡眠”:对于任何事物不作意的人,生起了昏沉睡眠。显示巴利原文
Thinamiddhanti kiñci amanasikarontassa thinamiddhaṃ udapādi.
“惊悚”:他放大朝向雪山的光明后,看见了檀那婆、罗刹、巨蟒等,于是心生惊悚。显示巴利原文
Chambhitattanti himavantābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dānavarakkhasaajagarādayo addasa, athassa chambhitattaṃ udapādi.
“浮动”:当他心想“我所见的恐怖,平常观察时并不存在;对于未曾见的,又有什么可畏惧的呢?”如此思惟时,心中便生起了浮动。“一时”:指仅以一次努力,便可见到五个宝藏瓶。显示巴利原文
Uppilanti ‘‘mayā diṭṭhabhayaṃ pakatiyā olokiyamānaṃ natthi. Adiṭṭhe kiṃ nāma bhaya’’nti cintayato uppilāvitattaṃ udapādi. Sakidevāti ekapayogeneva pañca nidhikumbhiyopi passeyya.
“粗重”:意为,我过于用力地策励精进,由此生起了浮动;于是我将精进放松,便产生了身不安、身粗重与身懈怠。显示巴利原文
Duṭṭhullanti mayā vīriyaṃ gāḷhaṃ paggahitaṃ, tena me uppilaṃ uppannanti vīriyaṃ sithilamakāsi, tato kāyadaratho kāyaduṭṭhullaṃ kāyālasiyaṃ udapādi.
“过猛精进”:意为,因自念“我放松精进时生起了粗重”,便再次策励精进,于是产生了过猛精进。“可能坠落”:意为可能死去。显示巴利原文
Accāraddhavīriyanti mama vīriyaṃ sithilaṃ karoto duṭṭhullaṃ uppannanti puna vīriyaṃ paggaṇhato accāraddhavīriyaṃ udapādi. Patameyyāti mareyya.
“过缓精进”:意为,因自念“我策励精进时其情形如此”,于是再次放松精进,便产生了过缓精进。显示巴利原文
Atilīnavīriyanti mama vīriyaṃ paggaṇhato evaṃ jātanti puna vīriyaṃ sithilaṃ karoto atilīnavīriyaṃ udapādi.
「希求」:将光明向天界的方向扩展后,看见了天众,便生起了渴爱。显示巴利原文
Abhijappāti devalokābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā devasaṅghaṃ passato taṇhā udapādi.
「种种想」:当我作意于一类色时,生起了这样的希求:“我要作意种种不同的色。”于是,时而朝向天界、时而朝向人界地扩展光明,在作意种种不同的色时,便生起了种种想。显示巴利原文
Nānattasaññāti mayhaṃ ekajātikaṃ rūpaṃ manasikarontassa abhijappā uppannā, nānāvidharūpaṃ manasi karissāmīti kālena devalokābhimukhaṃ kālena manussalokābhimukhaṃ vaḍḍhetvā nānāvidhāni rūpāni manasikaroto nānattasaññā udapādi.
「过度思察」:当我作意种种不同的色而生起种种想之后,又想:“我应该只作意同一类的色,无论是可意的还是不可意的。”如此作意时,便生起了对色的过度思察。显示巴利原文
Atinijjhāyitattanti mayhaṃ nānāvidhāni rūpāni manasikarontassa nānattasaññā udapādi, iṭṭhaṃ vā aniṭṭhaṃ vā ekajātikameva manasi karissāmīti tathā manasikaroto atinijjhāyitattaṃ rūpānaṃ udapādi.
243 “我作意光相”:即我只作意遍作光。“而不见色”:我以天眼而不见色。“我作意色相”:即我只作意天眼所缘之色。显示巴利原文
243.Obhāsanimittaṃmanasi karomīti parikammobhāsameva manasi karomi. Na ca rūpāni passāmīti dibbacakkhunā rūpāni na passāmi. Rūpanimittaṃ manasi karomīti dibbacakkhunā visayarūpameva manasi karomi.
“光是小范围的”:指光仅限于小范围。“色也是小范围的”:指色仅限于小范围。反之,即可了知第二种说法。“定是小范围的”:遍作光是小范围的,因光是小范围之故,此处将遍作定称为“小范围的”。“那时我的(天眼)是小范围的”:在那时,天眼也是小范围的。同理,“无量”一节也依此类推。显示巴利原文
Parittañceva obhāsanti parittakaṭṭhāne obhāsaṃ. Parittāni ca rūpānīti parittakaṭṭhāne rūpāni. Vipariyāyena dutiyavāro veditabbo. Paritto samādhīti parittako parikammobhāso, obhāsaparittatañhi sandhāya idha parikammasamādhi ‘‘paritto’’ti vutto. Parittaṃ me tasmiṃ samayeti tasmiṃ samaye dibbacakkhupi parittakaṃ hoti. Appamāṇavārepi eseva nayo.
245 “无寻唯伺”:在五禅那中,指第二禅那的定。“无寻无伺”:在四禅那与五禅那两者中,指(后)三种禅那的定。“有喜”:指具有二禅那和三禅那性质的定。“无喜”:指具有二禅那性质的定。“与乐俱行”:指具有三禅那和四禅那性质的定。“与舍俱行”:在四禅那中,指第四禅那的定;在五禅那中,指第五禅那的定。显示巴利原文
245.Avitakkampi vicāramattanti pañcakanaye dutiyajjhānasamādhiṃ. Avitakkampi avicāranti catukkanayepi pañcakanayepi jhānattayasamādhiṃ. Sappītikanti dukatikajjhānasamādhiṃ. Nippītikanti dukajjhānasamādhiṃ. Sātasahagatanti tikacatukkajjhānasamādhiṃ. Upekkhāsahagatanti catukkanaye catutthajjhānasamādhiṃ pañcakanaye pañcamajjhānasamādhiṃ.
然世尊何时修习此三种定?即坐于大菩提树下,入后夜分之时。世尊的第一道为初禅那,第二道等则依次为第二、第三、第四禅那。若依五禅那之说,则无与第五禅那相应之道,故第五禅那只属世间。此言乃就世间与出世间混合而说。其余各处,皆明白易懂。显示巴利原文
Kadā pana bhagavā imaṃ tividhaṃ samādhiṃ bhāveti? Mahābodhimūle nisinno pacchimayāme. Bhagavato hi paṭhamamaggo paṭhamajjhāniko ahosi, dutiyādayo dutiyatatiyacatutthajjhānikā . Pañcakanaye pañcamajjhānassa maggo natthīti so lokiyo ahosīti lokiyalokuttaramissakaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
此出自《中部》注释书《破除迷执》。显示巴利原文
Papañcasūdaniyā majjhimanikāyaṭṭhakathāya
《随烦恼经》的注释(Upakkilesasuttavaṇṇanā)到此结束。显示巴利原文
Upakkilesasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
9. 《愚者与智者经》的注释(Bālapaṇḍitasuttavaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
9. Bālapaṇḍitasuttavaṇṇanā
246 ‘如是我闻’一句,为《愚者与智者经》之开篇。其中:
‘愚者的特征’:依这些特征而可辨识‘此人是愚者’,故名愚者之特征。这些亦即识别愚者之相,故称‘愚者的相’;记别愚者之行迹,则称‘愚者的行迹’。
‘邪思惟者’:彼思惟时,因具贪欲、瞋恨与邪见,所起思惟悉为邪思。
‘邪语者’:彼发言时,所语悉为妄语等邪语。
‘邪业者’:彼造作时,所行悉为杀生等恶业。
‘彼于其集会中’:指彼所在之集会。
‘与彼相应、适合彼者’:意谓与其品类相同、相称,即关联五种怨结现世与来世之过患。
‘于彼处’:指当如是言论正在被谈论之处。
此处‘愚者’等词,为属格意义之宾格用法。显示巴利原文
246.Evaṃme sutanti bālapaṇḍitasuttaṃ. Tattha bālalakkhaṇānīti bālo ayanti etehi lakkhiyati ñāyatīti bālalakkhaṇāni. Tāneva tassa sañjānanakāraṇānīti bālanimittāni. Bālassa apadānānīti bālāpadānāni. Duccintitacintīti cintayanto abhijjhābyāpādamicchādassanavasena duccintitameva cinteti. Dubbhāsitabhāsīti bhāsamānopi musāvādādibhedaṃ dubbhāsitameva bhāsati. Dukkaṭakammakārīti karontopi pāṇātipātādivasena dukkaṭakammameva karoti. Tatra ceti yattha nisinno, tassaṃ parisati. Tajjaṃ tassāruppanti tajjātikaṃ tadanucchavikaṃ, pañcannaṃ verānaṃ diṭṭhadhammakasamparāyikaādīnavappaṭisaṃyuttanti adhippāyo. Tatrāti tāya kathāya kacchamānāya. Bālantiādīni sāmiatthe upayogavacanaṃ.
248 「Olambantī」意为“现起”。文中其余二词为其同义词,因为那些法是以依靠等形态现起的,故如此表述。
「于地依靠」:意即在地面上扩展。其余二词亦为同义词,扩展的形态正是如此。
「在那里,比丘们,对于愚者」:当那样的现起形态呈现于前时,愚者便生起此想。显示巴利原文
248.Olambantīti upaṭṭhahanti. Sesapadadvayaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ, olambanādiākārena hi tāni upaṭṭhahanti, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Pathaviyā olambantīti pathavitale pattharanti. Sesapadadvayaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Pattharaṇākāroyeva hesa. Tatra, bhikkhave, bālassāti tasmiṃ upaṭṭhānākāre āpāthagate bālassa evaṃ hoti.
249 「他说了这话」:这是一位善于连结的比丘所说。他心里想:“地狱的譬喻是没办法做的。”世尊并没有说“没办法”,而是说“不容易”。然而“不容易”并非就不可能做到。于是他又想:“那就让我请十力者来作个譬喻吧。”接着便说了那句:“能办到,尊者!”
「会击打」:意谓穿透般地击打,如同在同一处落下两记打击。因此他身上会现起两百个伤口。自此以下,方法皆同。显示巴利原文
249.Etadavocāti anusandhikusalo bhikkhu ‘‘nirayassa upamā kātuṃ na sakkā’’ti na bhagavā vadati, ‘‘na sukarā’’ti pana vadati, na sukaraṃ pana sakkā hoti kātuṃ, handāhaṃ dasabalaṃ upamaṃ kārāpemīti cintetvā etaṃ ‘‘sakkā, bhante’’ti vacanaṃ avoca. Haneyyunti vinivijjhitvā gamanavasena yathā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne dve pahārā nipatanti, evaṃ haneyyuṃ. Tenassa dve vaṇamukhasatāni honti. Ito uttaripi eseva nayo.
250 「掌量」:指仅能置于拳头内的分量。
「连计算也达不到」:意即连计数都谈不上。
「连一分也达不到」:连说它达到百分之一、千分之一或十万分之一,这样的说法都不成立。
「连譬喻也达不到」:连近似的比方都达不到,观察者连可资观察的一丝一毫也不存在。
「炽热的铁桩」:让长达三由旬的身体仰卧在烧得通红的铁地上,在他右手插入棕榈叶那么大的铁桩,左手等处同样插入。不仅仰卧,也让他俯卧、右侧卧、左侧卧,如此一一施加那些刑罚。
「使之躺卧后」:让长达三由旬的身体躺在烧得通红的铁地上。
「用斧头」:用大如能盖住半边屋顶的巨斧去砍削。血如江河奔涌,从铁地上腾起的火焰吞没被砍削之处。剧烈的痛苦生起,而施刑者却像处理木头一样,将它刨平,砍成八角、六棱之形。
「用凿子」:用大如大簸箕的凿子。他们用这些工具从皮肤缓缓削至骨头,每削一下,削去之处又恢复原样。
「系于车后」:连带着轭、系轭绳、五轮、车辕、刺棒等,一同拴在那辆浑身燃烧着烈焰的车上。
「大」:指大如一座尖顶阁楼那样。
「使之登上」:显示巴利原文
250.Pāṇimattanti antomuṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhapanamattaṃ. Saṅkhampi na upetīti gaṇanamattampi na gacchati. Kalabhāgampīti satimaṃ kalaṃ sahassimaṃ kalaṃ satasahassimaṃ vā kalaṃ upagacchatītipi vattabbataṃ na upeti. Upanidhampīti upanikkhepanamattampi na upeti, olokentassa olokitamattampi natthi. Tattaṃayokhilanti tigāvutaṃ attabhāvaṃ sampajjalitāya lohapathaviyā uttānakaṃ nipajjāpetvā tassa dakkhiṇahatthe tālappamāṇaṃ ayasūlaṃ pavesenti, tathā vāmahatthādīsu. Yathā ca uttānakaṃ nipajjāpetvā, evaṃ urenapi dakkhiṇapassenapi vāmapassenapi nipajjāpetvā taṃ kammakāraṇaṃ karontiyeva. Saṃvesetvāti sampajjalitāya lohapathaviyā tigāvutaṃ attabhāvaṃ nipajjāpetvā. Kuṭhārīhīti mahatīhi gehassa ekapakkhachadanamattāhi kuṭhārīhi tacchanti. Lohitaṃ nadī hutvā sandati, lohapathavito jālā uṭṭhahitvā tacchitaṭṭhānaṃ gaṇhanti. Mahādukkhaṃ uppajjati, tacchantā pana suttāhataṃ karitvā dārū viya aṭṭhaṃsampi chaḷaṃsampi karonti. Vāsīhīti mahāsuppapamāṇāhi vāsīhi. Tāhi tacchantā tacato yāva aṭṭhīni saṇikaṃ tacchanti, tacchitaṃ tacchitaṃ paṭipākatikaṃ hoti. Rathe yojetvāti saddhiṃ yugayottapañcaracakkakubbarapācanehi sabbato sampajjalite rathe yojetvā. Mahantanti mahākūṭāgārappamāṇaṃ. Āropentīti sampajjalitehi ayamuggarehi pothentā āropenti. Sakimpiuddhanti supakkuthitāya ukkhaliyā pakkhittataṇḍulā viya uddhaṃ adho tiriyañca gacchati.
「以部分计量」:即划分为各个部分而分别衡量。「周围」:指被环绕包围。「用铁」:指上方以铁板覆盖。显示巴利原文
Bhāgaso mitoti bhāge ṭhapetvā ṭhapetvā vibhatto. Pariyantoti parikkhitto. Ayasāti upari ayapaṭṭena chādito.
「遍满四方百由旬而住」:即如此遍满而住,犹如站在百由旬外围观眺者,双眼仿佛一对圆球般凸出。显示巴利原文
Samantā yojanasataṃ pharitvā tiṭṭhatīti evaṃ pharitvā tiṭṭhati, yathā samantā yojanasate ṭhāne ṭhatvā olokentassa akkhīni yamakagoḷakā viya nikkhamanti.
「难以用言说穷尽」:意谓地狱之苦如此深重、如此深重,纵然用百年、千年去讲,也无法说至尽头,无法彻底说明。显示巴利原文
Na sukarā akkhānena pāpuṇitunti nirayo nāma evampi dukkho evampi dukkhoti vassasataṃ vassasahassaṃ kathentenāpi matthakaṃ pāpetvā kathetuṃ na sukarāti attho.
251 「齿剔」:以牙齿剔出,即拔出的意思。「味贪」:因贪着滋味而受用的味。显示巴利原文
251.Dantullehakanti dantehi ullehitvā, luñcitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Rasādoti rasagedhena paribhuttaraso.
252 「互相食」:即互相啖食。显示巴利原文
252.Aññamaññakhādikāti aññamaññakhādanaṃ.
「丑陋」:指相貌难看。「难见」:如同为了吓唬孩童而装扮的夜叉,令人难以直视。「矮瘿」:矮小,缩颈而大腹。「盲」:或一目盲,或双目盲。「曲」:或一手弯曲,或双手弯曲。「跛」:如跛凳般行走。「以其身愁」:此语为显其受苦相续不断而说。显示巴利原文
Dubbaṇṇoti durūpo. Duddasikoti dārakānaṃ bhayāpanatthaṃ katayakkho viya duddaso. Okoṭimakoti lakuṇḍako paviṭṭhagīvo mahodaro. Kāṇoti ekakkhikāṇo vā ubhayakkhikāṇo vā. Kuṇīti ekahatthakuṇī vā ubhayahatthakuṇī vā. Pakkhahatoti pīṭhasappī. Sokāyenāti idamassa dukkhānupabandhadassanatthaṃ āraddhaṃ.
“以失败”:即因赌输。“会招致束缚”:因为他输得太多,即便倾尽全部家产也不足以偿还,最终连自身也会被绑缚。“完整的、圆满的愚者地”:愚人将三种恶行造作圆满后,投生于地狱;在那里受尽残余的业报,再得人身时,只会投生于五种低贱的家庭;之后他又再次行满三种恶行,重堕地狱——这便叫作完整的、圆满的愚者地。显示巴利原文
Kaliggahenāti parājayena. Adhibandhaṃ nigaccheyyāti yasmā bahuṃ jito sabbasāpateyyampissa nappahoti, tasmā attanāpi bandhaṃ nigaccheyya. Kevalā paripūrā bālabhūmīti bālo tīṇi duccaritāni pūretvā niraye nibbattati, tattha pakkāvasesena manussattaṃ āgato pañcasu nīcakulesu nibbattitvā puna tīṇi duccaritāni pūretvā niraye nibbattatīti ayaṃ sakalā paripuṇṇā bālabhūmi.
253 “智者相”等,应如前文所述来理解。而此处的“善思虑者”等,则应配合意善行等来理解。显示巴利原文
253.Paṇḍitalakkhaṇānītiādi vuttānusāreneva veditabbaṃ. Sucintitacintītiādīni cettha manosucaritādīnaṃ vasena yojetabbāni.
轮宝解释显示巴利原文
Cakkaratanavaṇṇanā
256 “洗头”:指用香水沐浴,连同头部一起洗净。“持布萨者”:即受持布萨支的人。“登上宫殿最胜处”:指登上胜殿高处,享用美食后,再登上胜殿高处的大露台,进入卧房,忆念戒行。据说那时,国王在清晨便施舍了十万财物,行大布施,又用十六罐香水洗头,用过早餐,将洁净的郁多罗僧衣搭于一肩,登上宫殿最上层的吉祥床座,结跏趺坐,忆念自己的布施功德。这乃是一切转轮王的常法。显示巴利原文
256.Sīsaṃ nhātassāti sīsena saddhiṃ gandhodakena nhātassa. Uposathikassāti samādinnauposathaṅgassa. Uparipāsādavaragatassāti pāsādavarassa upari gatassa subhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā pāsādavarassa upari mahātale sirīgabbhaṃ pavisitvā sīlāni āvajjantassa. Tadā kira rājā pātova satasahassaṃ vissajjetvā mahādānaṃ datvā punapi soḷasahi gandhodakaghaṭehi sīsaṃ nhāyitvā katapātarāso suddhaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ ekaṃsaṃ katvā uparipāsādassa sirīsayane pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisinno attano dānamayapuññasamudayaṃ āvajjetvā nisīdati, ayaṃ sabbacakkavattīnaṃ dhammatā .
当他们这样忆念时,以所说的善业为缘、由时节所生的天界轮宝,便如蓝宝石堆一般显现出来,仿佛劈开东方大海的水面,庄严虚空。此轮宝因具足天界威神力,故称为“天界的”;因有一千根辐条,故称为“千辐的”;因具足轮辋与轮毂,故称为“有辋有毂的”;因一切行相皆圆满,故称为“一切行相圆满的”。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ taṃ āvajjantānaṃyeva vuttappakārapuññakammapaccayaṃ utusamuṭṭhānaṃ nīlamaṇisaṅghāṭasadisaṃ pācīnasamuddajalatalaṃ chindamānaṃ viya ākāsaṃ alaṅkurumānaṃ viya dibbaṃ cakkaratanaṃ pātubhavati. Tayidaṃ dibbānubhāvayuttattā dibbanti vuttaṃ. Sahassaṃ assa arānanti sahassāraṃ. Saha nemiyā saha nābhiyā cāti sanemikaṃ sanābhikaṃ. Sabbehi ākārehi paripūranti sabbākāraparipūraṃ.
其中,“轮”是轮,又因能令心生喜悦而为宝,合称“轮宝”。其中,因有轮毂而称为“有毂的”那个部分,由帝青宝石所成。它的中央有一个银制轮毂管槽,犹如以洁白光滑的齿列在微笑,闪闪发光。中央有月轮,犹如孔洞;两侧外边有银板作为边界。其中,轮毂管槽与边界银板的接合处,分界线清晰可见。这是它轮毂的一切行相圆满。显示巴利原文
Tattha cakkañca taṃ ratijananaṭṭhena ratanañcāti cakkaratanaṃ. Yāya pana taṃ nābhiyā ‘‘sanābhika’’nti vuttaṃ, sā indanīlamaṇimayā hoti. Majjhe panassā rajatamayā panāḷi, yāya suddhasiniddhadantapantiyā hasamānaṃ viya virocati. Majjhe chiddena viya candamaṇḍalena ubhosupi bāhirantesu rajatapaṭṭena kataparikkhepo hoti. Tesu panassā nābhipanāḷi parikkhepapaṭṭesu yuttaṭṭhāne paricchedalekhā suvibhattāva hutvā paññāyanti. Ayaṃ tāvassa nābhiyā sabbākāraparipūratā.
那些使它被称为“千辐的”的辐条,由七宝所成,如同太阳光线般光辉灿烂。辐条上的接合点与分界线等,也都清晰可辨。这是它辐条的一切行相圆满。显示巴利原文
Yehi pana taṃ arehi ‘‘sahassāra’’nti vuttaṃ, te sattaratanamayā sūriyarasmiyo viya pabhāsampannā honti. Tesampi ghaṭamaṇikaparicchedalekhādīni suvibhattāneva paññāyanti. Ayamassa arānaṃ sabbākāraparipūratā.
所谓‘有辋’的轮辋部分,仿佛嘲弄初阳的光辉一般,通体由极其红润、洁净、光滑的珊瑚所成。在它的接合处,呈现晚霞般光彩的红色阎浮金板和圆形的分界线,都清晰分明地显现。这是轮辋一切行相的圆满。显示巴利原文
Yāya pana taṃ nemiyā saha ‘‘sanemika’’nti vuttaṃ, sā bālasūriyarasmikalāpasiriṃ avahasamānā viya surattasuddhasiniddhapavāḷamayā hoti. Sandhīsu panassā sañjhārāgasassirikarattajambonadapaṭṭā vaṭṭaparicchedalekhā ca suvibhattā paññāyanti. Ayamassa nemiyā sabbākāraparipūratā.
而在轮辋环面的背面,每十根辐条之间,有一根像吹箭筒一样内部中空、有孔环装饰、能受风的珊瑚棒。当风吹击它时,会发出如同被善巧演奏的五支乐器的声音,美妙、令人喜爱、令人愉悦。而且,在那珊瑚棒的上方,有白色伞盖,两边有垂下的花鬘排。就这样,轮辋界限由一百根带白色伞盖的珊瑚棒庄严,并由两百排垂下的花鬘排围绕。在两个轮毂管槽的里面,有两个狮口,从那里垂下两串珍珠鬘,它们如同棕榈树干般大小,具有满月光辉束的美丽,末端带有像幼阳般红色的羊毛球。当它们在虚空中与轮宝一起转动时,三个轮子看起来好像在同时转动,仿佛超越了天河行进的美妙。这是它总体的一切行相圆满。显示巴利原文
Nemimaṇḍalapiṭṭhiyaṃ panassa dasannaṃ dasannaṃ arānamantare dhamanavaṃso viya antosusiro chiddamaṇḍalacitto vātagāhī pavāḷadaṇḍo hoti, yassa vātena paharitassa sukusalasamannāhatassa pañcaṅgikatūriyassa viya saddo vaggu ca rajanīyo ca kamanīyo ca hoti. Tassa kho pana pavāḷadaṇḍassa upari setacchattaṃ, ubhosu passesu samosaritakusumadāmapantiyoti evaṃ samosaritakusumadāmapantisatadvayaparivārena setacchattasatadhārinā pavāḷadaṇḍasatena samupasobhitanemiparikkhepassa dvinnampi nābhipanāḷīnaṃ anto dve sīhamukhāni honti, yehi tālakkhandhappamāṇā puṇṇacandakiraṇakalāpasassirikā taruṇaravisamānarattakambalageṇḍukapariyantā ākāsagaṅgāgatisobhaṃ abhibhavamānā viya dve muttakalāpā olambanti, yehi cakkaratanena saddhiṃ ākāse samparivattamānehi tīṇi cakkāni ekato parivattantāni viya khāyanti. Ayamassa sabbaso sabbākāraparipūratā.
而这具足一切行相的轮宝,在人们吃过晚餐后,各自坐在自家门口设置的座位上,进行着谈话闲聊时;在孩童们在街道、十字路口等处玩耍时;它不高不低,在靠近森林丛树梢的空中区域,仿佛是在装饰树梢一般行进着;从十二由旬之外就能听到它甜美的声音,吸引着众生的耳朵;从一由旬之外,它放射出种种光芒的璀璨色彩,吸引着人们的眼睛,仿佛是在宣告转轮王的福德威力,正向王都而来。显示巴利原文
Taṃ panetaṃ evaṃ sabbākāraparipūraṃ pakatiyā sāyamāsabhattaṃ bhuñjitvā attano attano gharadvāre paññattāsanesu nisīditvā pavattakathāsallāpesu manussesu vīthicatukkādīsu kīḷamāne dārakajane nātiuccena nātinīcena vanasaṇḍamatthakāsannena ākāsappadesena upasobhayamānaṃ viya rukkhasākhaggāni, dvādasayojanato paṭṭhāya suyyamānena madhurassarena sattānaṃ sotāni odhāpayamānaṃ yojanato paṭṭhāya nānappabhāsamudayasamujjalena vaṇṇena nayanāni samākaḍḍhantaṃ rañño cakkavattissa puññānubhāvaṃ ugghosayantaṃ viya rājadhāniabhimukhaṃ āgacchati.
那时,那些人们一听到轮宝的声音,心中便寻思:“这声音是从哪里来的?是谁的?”他们望向东方,其中一人对另一人说:“瞧,朋友,真是奇妙!从前只有一轮满月独自升起,今天却带着伴儿一起升起了。这正像一对王雁、一对满月那样,一前一后地出现。”另一人对他说:“伙计,你在胡说什么?你在哪里见过两个满月一同升起?这分明是那个散发着灼热光芒、光幔灿烂的太阳升起来了!”又有一人笑着对他说:“你疯了吗?太阳刚刚才落山,怎么会紧跟着这月亮升起来呢?这肯定是一个闪耀着众多宝石光芒的东西,是某个大福德者的宫殿吧!”那些人都不赞同这些说法,而另有些人这样说:“你们为何胡言乱语?这既不是满月,也不是太阳,更不是天宫。这些东西都没有如此庄严的成就。这一定是轮宝。”显示巴利原文
Atha tassa cakkaratanassa saddassavaneneva ‘‘kuto nu kho, kassa nu kho ayaṃ saddo’’ti āvajjitahadayānaṃ puratthimadisaṃ olokayamānānaṃ tesaṃ manussānaṃ aññataro aññataraṃ evamāha – ‘‘passa bho acchariyaṃ, ayaṃ puṇṇacando pubbe eko uggacchati, ajja pana attadutiyo uggato, etañhi rājahaṃsamithunaṃ viya puṇṇacandamithunaṃ pubbāpariyena gaganatalaṃ abhilaṅghatī’’ti. Tamañño āha – ‘‘kiṃ kathesi samma kahaṃ nāma tayā dve puṇṇacandā ekato uggacchantā diṭṭhapubbā, nanu esa tapanīyaraṃsidhāro piñcharakiraṇo divākaro uggato’’ti. Tamañño sitaṃ katvā evamāha – ‘‘kiṃ ummattosi, nanu kho idānimeva divākaro atthaṅgato, so kathaṃ imaṃ puṇṇacandaṃ anubandhamāno uggacchissati, addhā panetaṃ anekaratanappabhāsamujjalaṃ ekassa puññavato vimānaṃ bhavissatī’’ti. Te sabbepi apasādayantā aññe evamāhaṃsu – ‘‘kiṃ bahuṃ vippalapatha, nevesa puṇṇacando, na sūriyo na devavimānaṃ. Na hetesaṃ evarūpā sirisampatti atthi, cakkaratanena panetena bhavitabba’’nti.
就在大众这样议论纷纷时,那轮宝离开月轮,朝向他们而来。于是他们问:“这是为谁而出现的呢?”便有传言的人回答:“不为别人,正是我们的国王——他已圆满了转轮王的德行,这就是为他出现的。”那时,那广大的人群,以及其他所有看见的人,全都跟着轮宝而行。轮宝仿佛要显示自己正是为了国王的利益而来一般,沿着城墙顶上绕城七匝,然后右绕国王的内宫,停在内宫北边的狮子窗附近,如同车轴固定一般止住不动,好让人们便于用香、花等来供养它。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pavattasallāpasseva tassa janassa candamaṇḍalaṃ ohāya taṃ cakkaratanaṃ abhimukhaṃ hoti. Tato tehi ‘‘kassa nu kho idaṃ nibbatta’’nti vutte bhavanti vattāro – ‘‘na kassaci aññassa, nanu amhākaṃ rājā pūritacakkavattivatto, tassetaṃ nibbatta’’nti. Atha so ca mahājano, yo ca añño passati, sabbo cakkaratanameva anugacchati. Tampi cakkaratanaṃ raññoyeva atthāya attano āgatabhāvaṃ ñāpetukāmaṃ viya sattakkhattuṃ pākāramatthakeneva nagaraṃ anusaṃyāyitvā rañño antepuraṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā antepurassa uttarasīhapañjaraāsanne ṭhāne yathā gandhapupphādīhi sukhena sakkā hoti pūjetuṃ, evaṃ akkhāhataṃ viya tiṭṭhati.
当它如此停住时,轮宝的光芒从窗牖缝隙等处照入内宫,闪烁着各种清净宝光的璀璨光辉,将内宫装点得灿烂夺目。国王看见这一团光芒,便生起了想要亲眼一睹轮宝的渴望。他的侍从们以爱语为礼,前来禀报此事。于是国王周身充盈着强烈的喜悦与欢快,解开结跏趺坐,从座上起身,走到狮子窗旁,看见那轮宝后,便思惟道:‘我确实听说过……我是否就是转轮王呢?’因此说道:‘那刹帝利灌顶王见到……我是否就是转轮王呢?’其中,‘他是否就是转轮王’的意思是:怎样才算转轮王?当轮宝离地升空,哪怕仅有一指、两指的高度,它便会转动起来。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ṭhitassa panassa vātapānacchiddādīhi pavisitvā nānāvirāgaratanappabhāsamujjalaṃ anto pāsādaṃ alaṅkurumānaṃ pabhāsamūhaṃ disvā dassanatthāya sañjātābhilāso rājā hoti. Parijanopissa piyavacanapābhatena āgantvā tamatthaṃ nivedeti. Atha rājā balavapītipāmojjaphuṭasarīro pallaṅkaṃ mocetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā sīhapañjarasamīpaṃ gantvā taṃ cakkaratanaṃ disvā ‘‘sutaṃ kho pana meta’’ntiādikaṃ cintanaṃ cintesi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘disvāna rañño khattiyassa…pe… assaṃ nu kho ahaṃ rājā cakkavattī’’ti. Tattha so hoti rājā cakkavattīti kittāvatā cakkavattī hoti? Ekaṅguladvaṅgulamattampi cakkaratane ākāsaṃ abbhuggantvā pavatte.
现在,为了说明使轮宝转动所应做之事,世尊说:“那时,比丘们……”等等。其中,“从座起身”是指从所坐的座位起身,来到轮宝近旁。“拿起罐”是指拿起一只有如象鼻般的金罐,用左手接水,说道:“尊贵的轮宝,请转动!尊贵的轮宝,请征服!”随后,转轮王便与四支军队一起……事实上,一切转轮王在灌顶时,只要说完“尊贵的轮宝,请征服!”话音刚落,轮宝便升入空中转动起来;就在转动的同时,那位国王便称为转轮王了。显示巴利原文
Idāni tassa pavattāpanatthaṃ yaṃ kātabbaṃ taṃ dassento atha kho, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha uṭṭhāyāsanāti nisinnāsanato uṭṭhahitvā cakkaratanasamīpaṃ āgantvā. Bhiṅkāraṃ gahetvāti hatthisoṇḍasadisapanāḷiṃ suvaṇṇabhiṅkāraṃ ukkhipitvā vāmahatthena udakaṃ gahetvā. Pavattatu bhavaṃ cakkaratanaṃ, abhivijinātu bhavaṃ cakkaratananti. Anvadeva rājā cakkavattī saddhiṃ caturaṅginiyā senāyāti sabbacakkavattīnañhi udakena abhisiñcitvā ‘‘abhivijānātu bhavaṃ cakkaratana’’nti vacanasamanantarameva vehāsaṃ abbhuggantvā cakkaratanaṃ pavattati, yassa pavattisamakālameva so rājā cakkavattī nāma hoti.
当轮宝转动时,转轮王登上最殊胜的车乘,紧随轮宝升入空中。这时,手持伞盖、拂尘等的侍从及内宫眷属也一同升空。接着,副王、将军等大众,佩戴种种衬甲、铠甲等装备,闪耀着各类饰物的光芒,高悬的旗帜与幡幢庄严点缀,与各自的军队一同升入空中,环绕在国王周围。与此同时,国王的使者们为了召集百姓,在城中大街小巷擂响大鼓,宣告:“诸位!我们国王的轮宝已经出现,请各随己力装饰,前来集合!”而大众原本一听到轮宝的声响,就早已放下手中一切事务,持香、花等前来聚集;此刻他们也都升入空中,环绕国王。凡是生起愿与国王同行之心的人,便都能安住空中。就这样,聚集的大众方圆各十二由旬。其中无一人身体残缺、衣服垢秽,因为转轮王的随众悉皆清净。转轮王的集会,犹如持明者的集会游行于空中,又如宝石散落在靛蓝宝石所成的地面一般。因此说:“接着,转轮王与四支军队一起……”显示巴利原文
Pavatte pana cakkaratane taṃ anubandhamānova rājā cakkavattī yānavaraṃ āruyha vehāsaṃ abbhuggacchati, athassa chattacāmarādihattho parijano ceva antepurajano ca. Tato nānappakārakañcukakavacādisannāhavibhūsitena vividhāharaṇappabhāsamujjalitena samussitaddhajapaṭākapaṭimaṇḍitena attano attano balakāyena saddhiṃ uparājasenāpati pabhūtayopi vehāsaṃ abbhuggantvā rājānameva parivārenti. Rājayuttā pana janasaṅgahatthaṃ nagaravīthīsu bheriyo carāpenti ‘‘tātā amhākaṃ rañño cakkaratanaṃ nibbattaṃ, attano attano vibhavānurūpena maṇḍitappasādhitā sannipatathā’’ti. Mahājano pana pakatiyā cakkaratanasaddeneva sabbakiccāni pahāya gandhapupphādīni ādāya sannipatitova, sopi sabbo vehāsaṃ abbhuggantvā rājānameva parivāreti. Yassa yassa hi raññā saddhiṃ gantukāmatā uppajjati, so so ākāsagatova hoti. Evaṃ dvādasayojanāyāmavitthārā parisā hoti. Tattha ekapurisopi chinnabhinnasarīro vā kiliṭṭhavattho vā natthi. Suciparivāro hi rājā cakkavattī. Cakkavattiparisā nāma vijjādharaparisā viya ākāse gacchamānā indanīlamaṇitale vippakiṇṇaratanasadisā hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anvadeva rājā cakkavattī saddhiṃ caturaṅginiyā senāyā’’ti.
那轮宝在树冠上方的空中,保持不高不低地转动,如此一来,需要花、果、枝叶的人便可容易摘取,而站在地上的人也能辨别:“这是国王,这是副王,这是将军。”在行、住、坐、卧一切威仪中,各人皆可随心所欲而行。那些从事绘画等技艺的人,也一边继续各自的工作,一边随行。正如在陆地上一般,他们在空中的一切事务皆得成就。就这样,轮宝带领转轮王的集会,从左侧绕过须弥山,越过大海上空,前往幅员八千由旬的东毗提诃洲。显示巴利原文
Tampi cakkaratanaṃ rukkhaggānaṃ uparūpari nātiuccena gaganapadesena pavattati, yathā rukkhānaṃ pupphaphalapallavehi atthikā tāni sukhena gahetuṃ sakkonti, bhūmiyaṃ ṭhitā ‘‘esa rājā, esa uparājā, esa senāpatī’’ti sallakkhetuṃ sakkonti. Ṭhānādīsupi iriyāpathesu yo yena icchati, so teneva gacchati. Cittakammādisippapasutā cettha attano attano kiccaṃ karontāyeva gacchanti. Yatheva hi bhūmiyaṃ, tathā nesaṃ sabbakiccāni ākāse ijjhanti. Evaṃ cakkavattiparisaṃ gahetvā taṃ cakkaratanaṃ vāmapassena sineruṃ pahāya samuddassa uparibhāgena aṭṭhayojanasahassappamāṇaṃ pubbavidehaṃ gacchati.
那里有一片适宜居住的区域:直径十二由旬,能容纳周长三十六由旬的集会大众;食物与用具易于获得,有树荫与水,地面洁净、平坦、宜人。轮宝便停驻在这片区域的上空,宛如车轴固定般不动。大众以轮宝的停驻为信号,便降落下来,随心沐浴、用食,处理诸务,就此安住。因此说:“比丘们,在轮宝停驻的那片区域,转轮王便与四支军队一同住下。”显示巴利原文
Tattha yo vinibbedhena dvādasayojanāya parikkhepato chattiṃsayojanaparisāya sannivesakkhamo sulabhāhārūpakaraṇo chāyūdakasampanno sucisamatalo ramaṇīyo bhūmibhāgo, tassa uparibhāge taṃ cakkaratanaṃ ākāse akkhāhataṃ viya tiṭṭhati. Atha tena saññāṇena so mahājano otaritvā yathāruci nhānabhojanādīni sabbakiccāni karonto vāsaṃ kappeti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmiṃ kho pana, bhikkhave, padese taṃ cakkaratanaṃ patiṭṭhāti, tattha rājā cakkavattī vāsaṃ upeti saddhiṃ caturaṅginiyā senāyā’’ti.
当转轮王如此安住时,此地的国王们即使听闻“外敌军队来了”,也不会集结军队备战。因为在轮宝出现的那一刻,没有任何有情还能把国王视为敌人而举起武器。这就是轮宝的威力。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vāsaṃ upagate cakkavattimhi ye tattha rājāno, te ‘‘paracakkaṃ āgata’’nti sutvāpi na balakāyaṃ sannipātetvā yuddhasajjā honti. Cakkaratanassa uppattisamanantarameva natthi so satto nāma, yo paccatthikasaññāya rājānaṃ ārabbha āvudhaṃ ukkhipituṃ visaheyya. Ayamanubhāvo cakkaratanassa.
由轮宝之威力,对此国王而言,
诸敌悉皆调伏;
这位名为‘调御敌者’的君王,
因此,这轮宝便被称为他的轮。
显示巴利原文 Cakkānubhāvena hi tassa rañño, Arī asesā damathaṃ upenti; Arindamaṃ nāma narādhipassa, Teneva taṃ vuccati tassa cakkaṃ.
因此,所有那些国王,各自带着与自己王国的祥瑞与威德相称的礼物,来到转轮王面前,谦恭地低下头,用自己王冠上的宝石光芒向这位灌顶者作足礼,并说出“请来吧,大王”等语,成为遵从他的吩咐的侍从。正因如此,世尊说:“诸比丘,在东方……教诫大王吧。”显示巴利原文
Tasmā sabbepi te rājāno attano attano rajjasirivibhavānurūpaṃ pābhataṃ gahetvā taṃ rājānaṃ upagamma onatasirā attano moḷiyamaṇippabhābhisekenassa pādapūjaṃ karonto ‘‘ehi kho mahārājā’’tiādīhi vacanehi tassa kiṅkārappaṭissāvitaṃ āpajjanti. Tena vuttaṃ ye kho pana, bhikkhave, puratthimāya…pe… anusāsa mahārājāti.
这里的“欢迎”(svāgata)即是“善来”(suāgamana),指善妙的到来。因为有的人到来时令人忧愁,离去时令人欢喜;有的人到来时令人欢喜,离去时令人忧愁。你是那种来令人欢喜、去令人悲伤的人,因此你的到来便称为善来。然而,当那些国王这样说完后,转轮王既不会说“你们每年应向我进贡多少财物”,也不会夺取此人的财物送给他人。他依照与法王身份相称的智慧,审视杀生等恶行之后,便以悦耳、柔和、令人欢喜的声音说法:‘亲爱的孩子们,你们要知道,杀生这种行为,若反复造作、勤加修习、多所积聚,将会招感地狱……’如此说法后,便给予‘不应杀生’等教诫。因此,世尊说:‘转轮王这样说:不应杀生……应随量而食。’显示巴利原文
Tattha svāgatanti suāgamanaṃ. Ekasmiñhi āgate socanti, gate nandanti. Ekasmiṃ āgate nandanti, gate socanti. Tādiso tvaṃ āgatanandano gamanasocano, tasmā tava āgamanaṃ suāgamananti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ vutte pana cakkavattī nāpi ‘‘ettakaṃ nāma me anuvassaṃ baliṃ upakappethā’’ti vadati, nāpi aññassa bhogaṃ acchinditvā aññassa deti. Attano pana dhammarājabhāvassa anurūpāya paññāya pāṇātipātādīni upaparikkhitvā pemanīyena mañjunā sarena ‘‘passatha tātā, pāṇātipāto nāmesa āsevito bhāvito bahulīkato nirayasaṃvattaniko hotī’’tiādinā nayena dhammaṃ desetvā ‘‘pāṇo na hantabbo’’tiādikaṃ ovādaṃ deti. Tena vuttaṃ rājā cakkavattī evamāha pāṇo na hantabbo…pe… yathābhuttañca bhuñjathāti.
然而,是不是所有国王都接受转轮王的这项教诫呢?即便是佛陀,也并非所有人都接受他的教导,何况是国王,接受的人又能有多少呢?因此,只有那些贤明、具足辨识力的人才会接受。不过,所有人都成为他的随从。所以世尊说:“诸比丘,而那些……”显示巴利原文
Kiṃ pana sabbepi rañño imaṃ ovādaṃ gaṇhantīti. Buddhassapi tāva sabbe na gaṇhanti, rañño kiṃ gaṇhissanti. Tasmā ye paṇḍitā vibhāvino, te gaṇhanti. Sabbe pana anuyantā bhavanti. Tasmā ‘‘ye kho pana, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha.
于是,那轮宝向东毗提诃的居民教诫之后,用过早餐,便藉着转轮王的神力腾空而起,进入东海。它越向前入海,海水便像嗅到药香、收起顶冠的龙王一般,浪花收敛,向下沉降,在离海面一由旬处,如同一面琉璃壁般稳稳安住。此时,散落在海床上的各种珍宝,仿佛都争相一睹国王福德祥瑞的风采,纷纷从四方汇聚而来,填满了那片海域。国王的随从大众见到铺满种种珍宝的海床,便随心所欲地用衣兜等器皿盛取宝物。随众取宝之后,那轮宝便折返而回。折返时,大众行在最前,国王居于中央,轮宝殿后。而海水仿佛被轮宝的庄严祥瑞所吸引,又似难忍别离,不断地轻拍在轮辋边缘,紧随着它。显示巴利原文
Atha taṃ cakkaratanaṃ evaṃ pubbavidehavāsīnaṃ ovāde dinne katapātarāse cakkavattībalena vehāsaṃ abbhuggantvā puratthimaṃ samuddaṃ ajjhogāhati. Yathā yathā ca taṃ ajjhogāhati, tathā tathā agadagandhaṃ ghāyitvā saṃkhittaphaṇo nāgarājā viya saṃkhittaūmivipphāraṃ hutvā ogacchamānaṃ mahāsamuddasalilaṃ yojanamattaṃ ogantvā antosamudde veḷuriyabhitti viya tiṭṭhati. Taṅkhaṇaññeva ca tassa rañño puññasiriṃ daṭṭhukāmāni viya mahāsamuddatale vippakiṇṇāni nānāratanāni tato tato āgantvā taṃ padesaṃ pūrayanti. Atha sā rājaparisā taṃ nānāratanaparipūraṃ mahāsamuddatalaṃ disvā yathāruci ucchaṅgādīhi ādiyati, yathāruci ādinnaratanāya pana parisāya taṃ cakkaratanaṃ paṭinivattati. Paṭinivattamāne ca tasmiṃ parisā aggato hoti, majjhe rājā, ante cakkaratanaṃ. Tampi jalanidhijalaṃ palobhiyamānamiva cakkaratanasiriyā, asahamānamiva ca tena viyogaṃ, nemimaṇḍalapariyantaṃ abhihanantaṃ nirantarameva upagacchati.
257 257. 就这样,转轮圣王征服了以东海为界的东毗提诃之后,为了征服以南海为界的赡部洲,便沿轮宝所示之道,朝向南海行进。因此说:“那时,诸比丘,轮宝进入东海又返回之后,便转向南方前进。”当它这样行进时,关于它前进的方式、军队的驻留、敌国国王的归服、对他们的教诫、进入南海、海水沉降以及获取珍宝等一切细节,皆应依照前面所述之理来理解。显示巴利原文
257. Evaṃ rājā cakkavattī puratthimasamuddapariyantaṃ pubbavidehaṃ abhivijinitvā dakkhiṇasamuddapariyantaṃ jambudīpaṃ vijetukāmo cakkaratanadesitena maggena dakkhiṇasamuddābhimukho gacchati. Tena vuttaṃ atha kho taṃ, bhikkhave, cakkaratanaṃ puratthimasamuddaṃ ajjhogāhetvā paccuttaritvā dakkhiṇaṃ disaṃ pavattatīti. Evaṃ pavattamānassa pana tassa pavattanavidhānaṃ senāsanniveso paṭirājagamanaṃ tesaṃ anusāsanippadānaṃ dakkhiṇasamuddaṃ ajjhogāhanaṃ samuddasalilassa ogacchanaṃ ratanādānanti sabbaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
征服方圆一万由旬的赡部洲后,又从南海返回。为征服方圆七千由旬的西牛货洲,如前所说一般前往,同样以海为界完成征服后,又从西海返回。继而,为征服方圆八千由旬的北俱卢洲,也如此前往,并同样征服至海之边际,最后从北海返回。显示巴利原文
Vijinitvā pana taṃ dasasahassayojanappamāṇaṃ jambudīpaṃ dakkhiṇasamuddatopi paccuttaritvā sattayojanasahassappamāṇaṃ aparagoyānaṃ vijetuṃ pubbe vuttanayeneva gantvā tampi samuddapariyantaṃ tatheva abhivijinitvā pacchimasamuddatopi paccuttaritvā aṭṭhayojanasahassappamāṇaṃ uttarakuruṃ vijetuṃ tatheva gantvā tampi samuddapariyantaṃ tatheva abhivijiya uttarasamuddatopi paccuttarati.
至此,转轮圣王已获得四方大地的统治权。这位克敌制胜的国王,为了展现自身王权成就的辉煌,便与随从一同腾空而起,飞向虚空。他们俯瞰下方,宛如遍布盛开红莲、青莲与白莲之林般庄严绚丽的四大再生湖,以及各有五百小岛环绕的四大洲。随后,沿轮宝所示之路,依来时的顺序返回王都。而那轮宝,便如安住在王宫宫门放射光辉一般,安然止住。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā raññā cakkavattinā cāturantāya pathaviyā ādhipaccaṃ adhigataṃ hoti. So evaṃ vijitavijayo attano rajjasirisampattidassanatthaṃ sapariso uddhaṃ gaganatalaṃ abhilaṅghitvā suvikasitapadumuppalapuṇḍarīkavanavicitte cattāro jātassare viya pañcasatapañcasataparittadīpaparivāre cattāro mahādīpe oloketvā cakkaratanadesiteneva maggena yathānukkamaṃ attano rājadhānimeva paccāgacchati. Atha taṃ cakkaratanaṃ antepuradvāraṃ sobhayamānaṃ viya hutvā tiṭṭhati.
当轮宝如此安住之后,王宫中便不再需要火炬或灯烛。仅仗轮宝的光明,就足以驱散夜间的黑暗。对于夜间需要黑暗的人来说,他们所处的黑暗亦如其旧。因此经中说:“它进入南海之后……如是轮宝便出现。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ patiṭṭhite pana tasmiṃ cakkaratane rājantepure ukkāhi vā dīpikāhi vā kiñci karaṇīyaṃ na hoti, cakkaratanobhāsoyeva rattiṃ andhakāraṃ vidhamati. Ye ca pana rattiṃ andhakāratthikā honti, tesaṃ andhakārameva hoti. Tena vuttaṃ dakkhiṇasamuddaṃ ajjhogāhetvā…pe… evarūpaṃ cakkaratanaṃ pātubhavatīti.
「象宝」的解释显示巴利原文
Hatthiratanavaṇṇanā
258 258. 轮宝如此出现后,为转轮圣王效力的大臣们便在平日安置吉祥象之处,准备了一块洁净地面,涂以白檀香等诸妙香。他们在地上遍撒各色芬芳的鲜花;又于金色星辰纹饰之间垂下悦目花环以庄严华盖,严饰如天宫。准备完毕,便向国王禀告:“大王!请一心忆念,如是象宝即将来临。”国王即依前述之法,广行大布施,受持净戒,端坐入定,专注己之福德成就。此时,由其福德威力所感召,从六牙白象族或布萨族而来的龙象王,欲来领受此殊胜礼敬。其足踝、颈项与面颊等处,色如初升日轮之鲜红,遍体洁白纯净,七处着地,身肢诸根极为匀称,足底犹如盛开之红莲,美不可言。犹如具大神力、飞行虚空之瑜伽行者,又如以朱砂涂敷之银色山峰,降落彼处。若来自六牙白象族,则为族中最幼者;若来自布萨象族,则为族中至大者。然而,圣典中只说“布萨龙象王”到来。显示巴利原文
258. Evaṃ pātubhūtacakkaratanassa panassa cakkavattino amaccā pakatimaṅgalahatthiṭṭhānaṃ sucibhūmibhāgaṃ kāretvā haricandanādīhi surabhigandhehi upalimpāpetvā heṭṭhā vicittavaṇṇasurabhikusumasamākiṇṇaṃ upari suvaṇṇatārakānaṃ antarantarā samosaritamanuñña-kusumadāmappaṭimaṇḍitavitānaṃ devavimānaṃ viya abhisaṅkharitvā ‘‘evarūpassa nāma deva hatthiratanassa āgamanaṃ cintethā’’ti vadanti. So pubbe vuttanayeneva mahādānaṃ datvā sīlāni samādāya taṃ puññasampattiṃ āvajjanto nisīdati, athassa puññānubhāvacodito chaddantakulā vā uposathakulā vā taṃ sakkāravisesaṃ anubhavitukāmo taruṇaravimaṇḍalābhirattacaraṇa-gīvamukhappaṭimaṇḍitavisuddhasetasarīro sattappatiṭṭho susaṇṭhitaṅgapaccaṅgasanniveso vikasitaratta-padumacārupokkharo iddhimā yogī viya vehāsaṃ gamanasamattho manosilācuṇṇarañjitapariyanto viya rajatapabbato hatthiseṭṭho tasmiṃ padese patiṭṭhāti. So chaddantakulā āgacchanto sabbakaniṭṭho āgacchati, uposathakulā sabbajeṭṭho. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘uposatho nāgarājā’’ icceva āgacchati. Svāyaṃ pūritacakkavattivattānaṃ cakkavattīnaṃ sutte vuttanayeneva cintayantānaṃ āgacchati, na itaresaṃ. Sayameva pakatimaṅgalahatthiṭṭhānaṃ āgantvā maṅgalahatthiṃ apanetvā tattha tiṭṭhati. Tena vuttaṃ puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave…pe… nāgarājāti.
当这头象宝如此出现时,象夫等人望见后满心欢喜,急忙前往报告国王。国王火速赶来,一见象宝便心生净信,心想:“这象乘实在殊胜,若能调伏顺服……”于是伸出手去。那象宝便如家养母牛的小牛犊一般,垂下双耳,展现出温顺的姿态,朝国王靠近。国王意欲骑乘,随从们明白了国王的心意,便为象宝披挂上金幢与金饰,再覆以金制网罩,然后牵到近前。国王不等它伏下身躯,便踩着七宝所成的阶梯登上象背,生起了飞空而行的心念。就在他这一念生起的当下,那头象王犹如天鹅王一般腾空而起,越过宛若蓝色宝石光芒流转的湛蓝虚空。接着,按照先前解说轮宝游行时的方法,国王的全部随从大众也一同飞升。就这样,国王与随从们在早餐之前便已巡行完整个大地,然后返回都城。转轮圣王的象宝便有如此广大的神变力。因此世尊才说:‘转轮圣王见了……如此象宝便会出现。’显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pātubhūtaṃ pana taṃ hatthiratanaṃ disvā hatthigopakādayo haṭṭhatuṭṭhā vegena gantvā rañño ārocenti. Rājā turitaturitaṃ āgantvā taṃ disvā pasannacitto ‘‘bhaddakaṃ vata bho hatthiyānaṃ, sace damathaṃ upeyyā’’ti cintayanto hatthaṃ pasāreti. Atha so gharadhenuvacchako viya kaṇṇe olambetvā sūratabhāvaṃ dassento rājānaṃ upasaṅkamati, rājā taṃ abhiruhitukāmo hoti. Athassa parijanā adhippāyaṃ ñatvā taṃ hatthiratanaṃ sovaṇṇaddhajaṃ sovaṇṇālaṅkāraṃ hemajālapaṭicchannaṃ katvā upanenti. Rājā taṃ anisīdāpetvāva sattaratanamayāya nisseṇiyā abhiruyha ākāsaṃ gamananinnacitto hoti. Tassa saha cittuppādeneva so hatthirājā rājahaṃso viya indanīlamaṇippabhājālanīlagaganatalaṃ abhilaṅghati, tato cakkacārikāya vuttanayeneva sakalarājaparisā. Iti sapariso rājā antopātarāseyeva sakalapathaviṃ anusaṃyāyitvā rājadhāniṃ paccāgacchati, evaṃ mahiddhikaṃ cakkavattino hatthiratanaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ disvāna rañño cakkavattissa…pe… evarūpaṃ hatthiratanaṃ pātubhavatīti.
马宝的解说显示巴利原文
Assaratanavaṇṇanā
当象宝如此出现之后,转轮圣王的眷属们便为马宝铺设了平日吉祥马所立的平坦洁净之地,并加以装饰,如同先前所述,策励国王忆念马宝的到来。那位国王一如前说,已行大布施、守持净戒,正坐在宫殿顶层,随念自己的福德成就。此时,由他福德威力的感召,从信度马族中来了一匹名为“雨云”的马王。它的身体犹如被闪电缠绕的秋天白云堆一般璀璨,蹄赤嘴红,身躯如月光凝聚般纯净、润滑、紧实。因为长着像鸦颈或蓝宝石那样乌黑的头,所以称为“黑头”;因为鬃毛仿佛精心梳理、顺伏安放,像萱草那样光滑、圆直且柔顺,所以称为“萱草鬃”;它能腾飞虚空。这匹马王来到该处,稳稳而立。其余一切当依象宝中所说的方法来理解。世尊为了说明这样的马宝,而宣说了“再者”等语。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pātubhūtahatthiratanassa pana cakkavattino parisā pakatimaṅgalaassaṭṭhānaṃ sucisamatalaṃ kāretvā alaṅkaritvā ca purimanayeneva rañño tassa āgamanacintanatthaṃ ussāhaṃ janenti. So purimanayeneva katadānasakkāro samādinnasīlova pāsādatale nisinno puññasampattiṃ samanussarati, athassa puññānubhāvacodito sindhavakulato vijjullatāvinaddhasaradakālasetavalāhakarāsisassiriko rattapādo rattatuṇḍo candappabhāpuñjasadisasuddhasiniddhaghanasaṅghātasarīro kākagīvā viya indanīlamaṇi viya ca kāḷavaṇṇena sīsena samannāgatattā kāḷasīso suṭṭhu kappetvā ṭhapitehi viya muñjasadisehi saṇhavaṭṭaujugatigatehi kesehi samannāgatattā muñjakeso vehāsaṅgamo valāhako nāma assarājā āgantvā tasmiṃ ṭhāne patiṭṭhāti. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ hatthiratane vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Evarūpaṃ assaratanaṃ sandhāya bhagavā puna caparantiādimāha.
珠宝的解说显示巴利原文
Maṇiratanavaṇṇanā
当马宝如此出现之后,转轮圣王的珠宝也现前了:从毗浮山来了一颗珠宝,它长达四肘,大小如车轮之毂,两端伸出极为纯净的珍珠束,并以两朵金莲花作装饰,有八万四千颗宝玉围绕四周,犹如众星捧月般光辉闪耀。当它如此来临时,人们便将珍珠束悬起,用竹子一节一节接长,举至六十肘高的空中。入夜之后,它的光明遍照方圆一由旬,令整个地方犹如曙光初现般明亮。于是,农民开始耕田,商人开门营业,各类工匠纷纷做起各自的活计,大家都以为天亮了。因此世尊说:‘再者,比丘们……珠宝出现。’显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pātubhūtaassaratanassa pana rañño cakkavattissa catuhatthāyāmaṃ sakaṭanābhisamappamāṇaṃ ubhosu antesu kaṇṇikapariyantato viniggatasuparisuddhamuttākalāpehi dvīhi kañcanapadumehi alaṅkataṃ caturāsītimaṇisahassaparivāraṃ tārāgaṇaparivutassa puṇṇacandassa siriṃ paṭippharamānaṃ viya vepullapabbatato maṇiratanaṃ āgacchati. Tassevaṃ āgatassa muttājālake ṭhapetvā veḷuparamparāya saṭṭhihatthappamāṇaṃ ākāsaṃ āropitassa rattibhāge samantā yojanappamāṇaṃ okāsaṃ ābhā pharati, yāya sabbo so okāso aruṇuggamanavelā viya sañjātāloko hoti. Tato kassakā kasikammaṃ, vāṇijā āpaṇugghāṭanaṃ , te te ca sippino taṃ taṃ kammantaṃ payojenti divāti maññamānā. Tena vuttaṃ puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave…pe… maṇiratanaṃ pātubhavatīti.
女宝的解说显示巴利原文
Itthiratanavaṇṇanā
然而,当摩尼宝珠这样出现之后,为转轮王带来微妙享乐之因的女宝便出现了。她或是从摩陀罗王族迎请来的正妃,或是藉由福德威力从北俱卢洲自然而来。至于其余相关的成就,经典中是以‘再者,比丘们,转轮圣王的女宝出现,她极为美丽、令人想见……’这样的方式叙述的。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pātubhūtamaṇiratanassa pana cakkavattissa visayasukhavisesakāraṇaṃ itthiratanaṃ pātubhavati. Maddarājakulato vā hissa aggamahesiṃ ānenti, uttarakuruto vā puññānubhāvena sayaṃ āgacchati. Avasesā panassā sampatti ‘‘puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, rañño cakkavattissa itthiratanaṃ pātubhavati abhirūpā dassanīyā’’tiādinā nayena pāḷiyaṃyeva āgatā.
在此,‘极为美丽’:因她容貌超逾常人,故称极为美丽。‘令人想见’:因见之能悦眼目,纵使放下其余事务也值得一睹。‘令心净信’:因见时能藉由生起喜悦而使心清净信乐。‘殊胜’:因能如此引生净信,故为最上。‘肤色端美’:指肤色的美好。‘具足’:指具备了肤色端美。或者也可这样解释:极为美丽,因她不太高也不矮;令人想见,因她不太瘦也不胖;令心净信,因她不太黑也不太白皙。具足最上等的肤色端美,因她超越了人间的肤色,却又未达到天神的肤色。因为人类身光照射不远,天神身光则照射过远,而她的身光却能遍照周围十二肘的范围。显示巴利原文
Tattha saṇṭhānapāripūriyā adhikaṃ rūpaṃ assāti abhirūpā. Dissamānā ca cakkhūni pīṇayati, tasmā aññaṃ kiccavikkhepaṃ hitvāpi daṭṭhabbāti dassanīyā. Dissamānā ca somanassavasena cittaṃ pasādetīti pāsādikā. Paramāyāti evaṃ pasādāvahattā uttamāya. Vaṇṇapokkharatāyāti vaṇṇasundaratāya. Samannāgatāti upetā. Abhirūpā vā yasmā nātidīghā nātirassā dassanīyā yasmā nātikisā nātithūlā, pāsādikā yasmā nātikāḷikā naccodātā. Paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgatā yasmā atikkantā mānusaṃ vaṇṇaṃ appattā dibbavaṇṇaṃ. Manussānañhi vaṇṇābhā bahi na niccharati, devānaṃ atidūraṃ niccharati, tassā pana dvādasahatthappamāṇaṃ padesaṃ sarīrābhā obhāseti.
在‘不太高、不太矮’等描述中,第一对(不太高、不太矮)是说身高圆满;第二对(不太瘦、不太胖)是说体态圆满;第三对(不太黑、不太白皙)是说肤色圆满。或者,通过这六句表明身无缺陷,而‘超越了人间的肤色’这一句则表明了身相的圆满成就。显示巴利原文
Nātidīghādīsu cassā paṭhamayugaḷena ārohasampatti, dutiyayugaḷena pariṇāhasampatti, tatiyayugaḷena vaṇṇasampatti vuttā. Chahi vāpi etehi kāyavipattiyā abhāvo, atikkantā mānusaṃ vaṇṇanti iminā kāyasampatti vuttā.
所谓‘或棉絮或木棉絮’,是指将经过百次梳理的棉絮,或经过百次梳理的木棉絮放入熟酥中放置后,所得的身体触感(即是如此)。‘凉’,指在国王感到凉爽之时;‘热’,指在国王感到炎热之时。‘栴檀香’,指身体在任何时候都散发上好研磨、新鲜、以四种成分调和的黄栴檀之香。‘青莲香’,指在微笑或说话时,口中散发犹如新绽青莲花般极其浓郁的香气。显示巴利原文
Tūlapicuno vā kappāsapicuno vāti sappimaṇḍe pakkhipitvā ṭhapitassa satavihatassa tūlapicuno vā satavihatassa kappāsapicuno vā kāyasamphasso hoti. Sīteti rañño sītakāle. Uṇheti rañño uṇhakāle. Candanagandhoti niccakālameva supisitassa abhinavassa catujjātisamāyojitassa haricandanassa gandho kāyato vāyati. Uppalagandhoti hasitakathitakālesu mukhato nikkhanto taṅkhaṇaṃ vikasitasseva nīluppalassa atisurabhigandho vāyati.
然而,为显示她具足色、触、香等胜妙之身所相应的行仪,而说‘再者,那位……’等。其中,‘先起迎者’:见国王时,犹如火烧一般即刻从座而起。‘随后坐者’:国王就座后,她先为国王扇风等作服侍,然后再恭敬地坐下。‘听命者’:应答‘天,我当作何?’(kiṃ karomi devāti?),即听候差遣。‘悦意而行者’:只做令国王悦意的事。‘爱语者’:只说令国王欢喜的话。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ rūpasamphassagandhasampattiyuttāya panassā sarīrasampattiyā anurūpaṃ ācāraṃ dassetuṃ taṃ kho panātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha rājānaṃ disvā nisinnāsanato aggidaḍḍhā viya paṭhamameva uṭṭhātīti pubbuṭṭhāyinī. Tasmiṃ nisinne tassa rañño tālavaṇṭena bījanādikiccaṃ katvā pacchā nipatati nisīdatīti pacchānipātinī. Kiṃ karomi devāti tassa kiṃkāraṃ paṭissāvetīti kiṃkārapaṭissāvinī. Rañño manāpameva carati karotīti manāpacārinī. Yaṃ rañño piyaṃ, tadeva vadatīti piyavādinī.
现在,为显示她的这些行仪出于本性清净,而非出自狡诈,故说‘再者,那位……’等。其中,‘不会逾矩而行’:指不越轨而行,意即对于其他男子,连心中都不起希求。其中,前文所说的‘美丽’等,以及后文所说的‘先起迎者’等功德,皆是自然本具的功德;而‘超胜人趣色貌’等,则当知是依靠转轮圣王的福德,自轮宝出现以后,由过去业的威力所生。又或者,自轮宝出现以后,她的美貌等一切行相都达到圆满。因此说‘这样的女宝便出现。’显示巴利原文
Idāni svāssā ācāro bhāvasuddhiyā eva, na sāṭheyyenāti dassetuṃ taṃ kho panātiādimāha. Tattha no aticaratīti na atikkamitvā carati, aññaṃ purisaṃ cittenapi na patthetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha ye tassā ādimhi ‘‘abhirūpā’’tiādayo ante ‘‘pubbuṭṭhāyinī’’tiādayo guṇā vuttā, te pakatiguṇā eva ‘‘atikkantā mānusaṃ vaṇṇa’’ntiādayo pana cakkavattino puññaṃ upanissāya cakkaratanapātubhāvato paṭṭhāya purimakammānubhāvena nibbattantīti veditabbā. Abhirūpatādikāpi vā cakkaratanapātubhāvato paṭṭhāya sabbākārapāripūrā jātā. Tenāha evarūpaṃ itthiratanaṃ pātubhavatīti.
居士宝注释显示巴利原文
Gahapatiratanavaṇṇanā
当女宝出现之后,为使转轮王所需的一切财富事业皆能如意运作,居士宝便出现于世。此人本为大富长者,出生于巨富之家,是能令国王财富增广的居士长者;且在轮宝威力的摄受下,他依宿业果报生起了天眼,凭此天眼,能于大地之内,照见一由旬范围内所藏的宝藏。他目睹自身这般成就后,心生欢喜,前往国王处,以承办一切财用而效劳。因此说:“再者,比丘们……这样的居士宝便出现。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pātubhūtaitthiratanassa pana rañño cakkavattissa dhanakaraṇīyānaṃ kiccānaṃ yathāsukhappavattanatthaṃ gahapatiratanaṃ pātubhavati. So pakatiyāva mahābhogo mahābhogakule jāto rañño dhanarāsivaḍḍhako seṭṭhi gahapati hoti, cakkaratanānubhāvasahitaṃ panassa kammavipākajaṃ dibbacakkhu pātubhavati, yena antopathaviyaṃ yojanabbhantare nidhiṃ passati. So taṃ sampattiṃ disvā tuṭṭhahadayo gantvā rājānaṃ dhanena pavāretvā sabbāni dhanakaraṇīyāni sampādeti. Tena vuttaṃ puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave…pe… evarūpaṃ gahapatiratanaṃ pātubhavatīti.
辅臣宝注释显示巴利原文
Pariṇāyakaratanavaṇṇanā
当居士宝出现之后,为能总摄办理转轮王的一切事务,辅臣宝便出现于世。他犹如国王的长子。此人天生聪慧、明敏、具足才智;又依凭国王的福德威力,加以自身业力的作用,生起了知他心智。凭借此智,在十二由旬范围的国王眷属中,他能了知众人内心的动向,善于分辨此事于王不利、此事于王有利。他同样见到自己这般威力后,心生欢喜,以指导一切事务而为国王效劳。因此说:“再者,比丘们……这样的辅臣宝便出现。”其中,“应任命者便任命之”,是指于各职位上,应任命何人,他便予以任命。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pātubhūtagahapatiratanassa pana rañño cakkavattissa sabbakiccasaṃvidhānasamatthaṃ pariṇāyakaratanaṃ pātubhavati. So rañño jeṭṭhaputtova hoti . Pakatiyā eva paṇḍito byatto medhāvī, rañño puññānubhāvaṃ nissāya panassa attano kammānubhāvena paracittañāṇaṃ uppajjati. Yena dvādasayojanāya rājaparisāya cittācāraṃ ñatvā rañño ahite hite ca vavatthapetuṃ samattho hoti. Sopi taṃ attano ānubhāvaṃ disvā tuṭṭhahadayo rājānaṃ sabbakiccānusāsanena pavāreti. Tena vuttaṃ puna caparaṃ…pe… pariṇāyakaratanaṃ pātubhavatīti. Tattha ṭhapetabbaṃ ṭhapetunti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhānantare ṭhapetabbaṃ ṭhapetuṃ.
259 关于“具平等果……”等句,释义如前所述。显示巴利原文
259.Samavepākiniyātiādi heṭṭhā vuttameva.
260 「以胜取」:即胜利之执取。「大财富聚」:谓顷刻间获得二三十万的财富。「纯全圆满的智者之地」:智者依三种善行圆满而投生天界;复从彼处来人界,转生于高贵的出身、美好的容貌、丰足的受用等成就之中;安住已,复又圆满三种善行,再投生天界——这便是完整、圆满的智者之地。其余各处,文义易明。显示巴利原文
260.Kaṭaggahenāti jayaggāhena. Mahantaṃ bhogakkhandhanti ekappahāreneva dve vā tīṇi vā satasahassāni. Kevalā paripūrā paṇḍitabhūmīti paṇḍito tīṇi sucaritāni pūretvā sagge nibbattati, tato manussalokaṃ āgacchanto kularūpabhogasampattiyaṃ nibbattati, tattha ṭhito tīṇi ca sucaritāni pūretvā puna sagge nibbattatīti ayaṃ sakalā paripuṇṇā paṇḍitabhūmi. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
《破除迷执》——《中部》注释书(Papañcasūdaniyā majjhimanikāyaṭṭhakathāya)显示巴利原文
Papañcasūdaniyā majjhimanikāyaṭṭhakathāya
第十:《天使经》的注疏显示巴利原文
10. Devadūtasuttavaṇṇanā
261 “如是我闻”此句,即《天使经》之开篇。其中“有两种家”等内容,在《马邑经》中已详作解说。显示巴利原文
261.Evaṃme sutanti devadūtasuttaṃ. Tattha dve agārātiādi assapurasutte vitthāritameva.
262 世尊说法,有时从地狱讲起,以天界作结;有时从天界讲起,以地狱作结。若欲详说天界成就,便略说地狱之苦、畜生道之苦、饿鬼道之苦及人界之成就,而后详展天界成就。若欲详说地狱之苦,便略说天界与人界成就、畜生道及饿鬼道之苦,而后详演地狱之苦。此经中,世尊欲详说地狱之苦,故从天界讲起,以地狱收束。略说天界与人界成就、畜生道及饿鬼道之苦已,为详说地狱之苦,便言:“诸比丘,彼时地狱狱卒……”等。显示巴利原文
262.Nirayaṃ upapannāti bhagavā katthaci nirayato paṭṭhāya desanaṃ devalokena osāpeti, katthaci devalokato paṭṭhāya nirayena osāpeti. Sace saggasampattiṃ vitthāretvā kathetukāmo hoti, nirayadukkhaṃ ekadesato katheti, tiracchānayonidukkhaṃ pettivisayadukkhaṃ manussalokasampattiṃ ekadesato katheti, saggasampattimeva vitthāreti. Sace nirayadukkhaṃ vitthāretvā kathetukāmo hoti, devalokamanussalokesu sampattiṃ tiracchānayonipettivisayesu ca dukkhaṃ ekadesato katheti, nirayadukkhameva vitthāreti. So imasmiṃ sutte nirayadukkhaṃ vitthāretukāmo, tasmā devalokato paṭṭhāya desanaṃ nirayena osāpeti. Devalokamanussalokasampattiyo tiracchānayonipettivisayadukkhāni ca ekadesato kathetvā nirayadukkhameva vitthārena kathetuṃ tamenaṃ, bhikkhave, nirayapālātiādimāha.
其中有些长老声称“地狱卒”这种东西并不存在,只是如同机器运作一般,业自己去造作而已。然而,这种说法在《阿毗达摩》中早已被驳斥:“地狱里有地狱卒吗?”“有的,而且还有行刑者。”正如在人界有执行刑罚的人,地狱里也同样有地狱卒。至于阎魔王,他是一位住在天宫里的鬼王,有时在天界的宫殿中享受天界的如意树、园林、舞女等种种成就,有时则承受业果。他是一位如法的君王。他并非单独一位,而是四座门各有一位,共四位。他说“没有见到”,是指没有见到任何一位被派到自己这里来的天使。阎魔知道此人未能领会话中的意思,为了让对方领会,便说道:“喂,……”等等。显示巴利原文
Tattha ekacce therā ‘‘nirayapālā nāma natthi, yantarūpaṃ viya kammameva kāraṇaṃ kāretī’’ti vadanti. Tesaṃ taṃ ‘‘atthi niraye nirayapālāti, āmantā, atthi ca kāraṇikā’’tiādinā nayena abhidhamme (kathā. 866) paṭisedhitameva. Yathā hi manussaloke kammakāraṇakārakā atthi, evameva niraye nirayapālā atthīti. Yamassa raññoti yamarājā nāma vemānikapetarājā, ekasmiṃ kāle dibbavimāne dibbakapparukkhadibbauyyānadibbanāṭakādisampattiṃ anubhavati, ekasmiṃ kāle kammavipākaṃ, dhammiko rājā. Na cesa ekova hoti, catūsu pana dvāresu cattāro janā honti. Nāddasanti attano santike pesitassa kassaci devadūtassa abhāvaṃ sandhāya evaṃ vadati. Atha naṃ yamo ‘‘nāyaṃ bhāsitassa atthaṃ sallakkhetī’’ti ñatvā sallakkhāpetukāmo ambhotiādimāha.
“有生法”:指具有生的本质,即尚未从生中解脱,生就存在于自身之内。其后“有老法”等,同理。显示巴利原文
Jātidhammoti jātisabhāvo, aparimutto jātiyā, jāti nāma mayhaṃ abbhantareyeva atthīti. Parato jarādhammotiādīsupi eseva nayo.
263 关于“审问第一个天使”这一段,此处的婴儿实际上是在说:“诸位请看,我也有和你们一样的手脚,却陷溺在自己的粪尿之中。由于自身的本性,我无法自行起身沐浴,我身体污秽,连说一声‘帮我洗洗’都做不到。正因为尚未从‘生’中解脱,才变成这般模样。不但我是如此,你们也同样未从‘生’中解脱。正如‘生’已降临到我头上,它也会降临到你们头上。因此,趁它尚未到来,你们应当多行善事。”正因为如此,他被称为“天使”。至于这个词的词义,已在《摩伽天经》中解说过。显示巴利原文
263.Paṭhamaṃ devadūtaṃ samanuyuñjitvāti ettha daharakumāro atthato evaṃ vadati nāma ‘‘passatha, bho, mayhampi tumhākaṃ viya hatthapādā atthi, sake panamhi muttakarīse palipanno, attano dhammatāya uṭṭhahitvā nhāyituṃ na sakkomi, ahaṃ kiliṭṭhagattomhi, nhāpetha manti vattumpi na sakkomi, jātitomhi aparimuttatāya ediso jāto. Na kho panāhameva, tumhepi jātito aparimuttāva. Yatheva hi mayhaṃ, evaṃ tumhākampi jāti āgamissati, iti tassā pure āgamanāva kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenesa devadūto nāma jāto, vacanattho pana maghadevasutte vuttova.
关于第二个天使这一段,在这里,那个衰老的众生其实是在说:‘诸位请看,我过去也像你们一样年轻,双腿有力、臂膀强壮、行动敏捷,而今这些力量与敏捷都已消失。虽然手脚还在,却无法再尽手脚之能,因为我尚未从“老”中解脱,才变成这般模样。而且不止是我,你们同样也还未从“老”中解脱。如同“老”已降临我身,它也会降临你们之身,所以在它到来之前,你们应当多行善事。’正因如此,他被称为‘天使’。显示巴利原文
Dutiyaṃdevadūtanti etthāpi jarājiṇṇasatto atthato evaṃ vadati nāma – ‘‘passatha, bho, ahampi tumhe viya taruṇo ahosiṃ ūrubalabāhubalajavanasampanno, tassa me tā balajavanasampattiyo antarahitā, vijjamānāpi me hatthapādā hatthapādakiccaṃ na karonti, jarāyamhi aparimuttatāya ediso jāto. Na kho panāhameva, tumhepi jarāya aparimuttāva. Yatheva hi mayhaṃ, evaṃ tumhākampi jarā āgamissati, iti tassā pure āgamanāva kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenesa devadūto nāma jāto.
关于第三个天使这一段,在这里,那个患病的众生其实是在说:‘诸位请看,我过去也像你们一样无病无痛,如今却被疾病击垮,困在自己的粪尿之中,连起身都做不到。虽然手脚还在,却无法再尽手脚之能,因为我尚未从“病”中解脱,才变成这般模样。而且不止是我,你们同样也还未从“病”中解脱。如同“病”已降临我身,它也会降临你们之身,所以在它到来之前,你们应当多行善事。’正因如此,他被称为‘天使’。显示巴利原文
Tatiyaṃ devadūtanti etthāpi gilānasatto atthato eva vadati nāma – ‘‘passatha, bho, ahampi tumhe viya nirogo ahosiṃ, somhi etarahi byādhinā abhihato sake muttakarīse palipanno, uṭṭhātumpi na sakkomi, vijjamānāpi me hatthapādā hatthapādakiccaṃ na karonti, byādhitomhi aparimuttatāya ediso jāto. Na kho panāhameva, tumhepi byādhito aparimuttāva. Yatheva hi mayhaṃ, evaṃ tumhākaṃ byādhi āgamissati, iti tassa pure āgamanāva kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenesa devadūto nāma jāto.
265 关于第四个天使这一段,在这里,‘天使’既可以指刑罚本身,也可以指行刑者。从刑罚这一方面说,三十二种刑罚其实是在说:‘我们并非生在树上或石头上,而是生在像你们这样的身体之中,所以在我们在你们体内生起之前,你们应当多行善事。’正因如此,这些刑罚被称为‘天使’。而从行刑者这方面说,他们其实是在说:‘我们执行这三十二种刑罚时,并非在树上等处下手,正是对像你们这样的众生下手,所以在我们对你们执行刑罚之前,你们应当多行善事。’正因如此,他们也成为‘天使’。显示巴利原文
265.Catutthaṃ devadūtanti ettha pana kammakāraṇā vā devadūtāti kātabbā kammakāraṇikā vā. Tattha pana kammakāraṇapakkhe bāttiṃsa tāva kammakāraṇā atthato evaṃ vadanti nāma – ‘‘mayaṃ nibbattamānā na rukkhe vā pāsāṇe vā nibbattāma, tumhādisānaṃ sarīre nibbattāma, iti amhākaṃ pure nibbattitova kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenete devadūtā nāma jātā. Kammakāraṇikāpi atthato evaṃ vadanti nāma – ‘‘mayaṃ dvattiṃsa kammakāraṇā karontā na rukkhādīsu karoma, tumhādisesu sattesuyeva karoma, iti amhākaṃ tumhesu pure kammakāraṇākaraṇatova kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenetepi devadūtā nāma jātā.
266 在“第五位天使”这一段中,这死者其实是在说:“诸君,请看被抛弃于荒冢间的我,已变得膨胀、青瘀等相,正因尚未从死亡解脱,才落得如此模样。而且不仅是我,你们同样未从死亡解脱。正如死亡降临于我,它也必将降临于你们。因此趁它尚未来临,你们应当多行善事。”正因如此,他被称为“天使”。显示巴利原文
266.Pañcamaṃ devadūtanti ettha matakasatto atthato evaṃ vadati nāma – ‘‘passatha bho maṃ āmakasusāne chaḍḍitaṃ uddhumātakādibhāvaṃ pattaṃ, maraṇatomhi aparimuttatāya ediso jāto. Na kho panāhameva, tumhepi maraṇato aparimuttāva. Yatheva hi mayhaṃ, evaṃ tumhākampi maraṇaṃ āgamissati, iti tassa pure āgamanāva kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenesa devadūto nāma jāto.
那么,什么人能受到这种天使的审问,什么人不能呢?首先,造作大量恶业的人,死后便直接投生于地狱。而只造作少量恶业的人,则会受到这种审问。正如抓到一个携赃的盗贼,会直接处置他,根本不会审判;但若是一个经过侦查才抓获的盗贼,便会将他带到审判处,经历一场审判。此处的道理也是如此。那些只造作少量恶业的人,有时自己能回想起来,有时在提醒之下也能记起。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ pana devadūtānuyogaṃ ko labhati, ko na labhatīti? Yena tāva bahuṃ pāpaṃ kataṃ, so gantvā niraye nibbattatiyeva. Yena pana parittaṃ pāpakammaṃ kataṃ, so labhati. Yathā hi sabhaṇḍaṃ coraṃ gahetvā kattabbameva karonti, na vinicchinanti. Anuvijjitvā gahitaṃ pana vinicchayaṭṭhānaṃ nayanti, so vinicchayaṃ labhati. Evaṃsampadametaṃ. Parittapāpakammā hi attano dhammatāyapi saranti, sāriyamānāpi saranti.
其中,据说有一位名叫长胜达米罗的人,就是自己忆念起来的。这位达米罗曾在善意山寺,用一块红布供养一座空中塔。后来他投生在地狱近边地狱的附近,一听到大火燃烧的呼呼声响,便立刻记起自己所供养的那块布,于是转生天界。又有一人,在给身为年轻比丘的儿子布施一件僧衣时,把衣服放在儿子脚下。临终之时,他以那衣服发出的沙沙声响作为相。他也投生于近边地狱的附近,借着火焰燃烧的声音,忆起那件僧衣,便转生天界。这就是他们依各自的方式,忆起往昔善业而投生天界的情形。显示巴利原文
Tattha dīghajayantadamiḷo nāma attano dhammatāya sari. So kira damiḷo sumanagirivihāre ākāsacetiyaṃ rattapaṭena pūjesi. Atha niraye ussadasāmante nibbatto aggijālasaddaṃ sutvāva attano pūjitapaṭaṃ anussari, so gantvā sagge nibbatto. Aparopi puttassa daharabhikkhuno khalisāṭakaṃ dento pādamūle ṭhapesi, maraṇakālamhi paṭapaṭāti sadde nimittaṃ gaṇhi, sopi ussadasāmante nibbatto jālasaddena taṃ sāṭakaṃ anussaritvā sagge nibbatto. Evaṃ tāva attano dhammatāya kusalaṃ kammaṃ saritvā sagge nibbattatīti.
若有人无法依自性记起,阎罗王便以五种天信逐一询问。其中有因第一天信而记起者,也有因第二天信等而记起者。如果连这五种天信都无法令其记起,阎罗王便亲自提点。据说曾有一位大臣,以一瓶善意花供养大塔庙,并将功德回向给阎罗王。后因不善业投生地狱,被带到阎罗王面前。当五种天信都未能令他回忆起任何善行时,阎罗王便亲自观察,看见他的善行后提醒道:‘你曾以一瓶善意花供养大塔庙,并把功德回向于我,不是吗?’他当下便记了起来,随即转生天界。然而,若阎罗王亲自反复查看,也丝毫不见这位众生有任何善行,便会想:‘这位众生必定要受极大的苦。’随后便沉默不语。显示巴利原文
Attano dhammatāya asarante pana pañca devadūte pucchati. Tattha koci paṭhamena devadūtena sarati, koci dutiyādīhi. Yo pana pañcahipi na sarati, taṃ yamo rājā sayaṃ sāreti. Eko kira amacco sumanapupphakumbhena mahācetiyaṃ pūjetvā yamassa pattiṃ adāsi, taṃ akusalakammena niraye nibbattaṃ yamassa santikaṃ nayiṃsu. Tasmiṃ pañcahipi devadūtehi kusale asarante yamo sayaṃ olokento disvā – ‘‘nanu tvaṃ mahācetiyaṃ sumanapupphakumbhena pūjetvā mayhaṃ pattiṃ adāsī’’ti sāresi, so tasmiṃ kāle saritvā devalokaṃ gato. Yamo pana sayaṃ oloketvāpi apassanto – ‘‘mahādukkhaṃ nāma anubhavissati ayaṃ satto’’ti tuṇhī hoti.
267 「大地狱中」:是指无间大地狱。那么它的量度如何呢?内部长与宽各为一百由旬。地面为热铁,顶盖为热铁,每面墙壁各有九由旬厚。从东墙升起的火焰,到达西墙、穿透西墙之后,再向外延伸一百由旬。其余各方也是如此。因此,按火焰边际计算,长宽共计三百一十八由旬;外部周长九百五十四由旬;若再加上四周的附属地狱,则一圈总计一万由旬。显示巴利原文
267.Mahānirayeti avīcimahānirayamhi. Kiṃ panassa pamāṇaṃ? Abbhantaraṃ āyāmena ca vitthārena ca yojanasataṃ hoti. Lohapathavī lohachadanaṃ ekekā ca bhitti navanavayojanikā hoti. Puratthimāya bhittiyā acci uṭṭhitā pacchimaṃ bhittiṃ gahetvā taṃ vinivijjhitvā parato yojanasataṃ gacchati. Sesadisāsupi eseva nayo. Iti jālapariyantavasena āyāmavitthārato aṭṭhārasayojanādhikāni tīṇi yojanasatāni, parikkhepato pana navayojanasatāni catupaṇṇāsayojanāni, samantā pana ussadehi saddhiṃ dasayojanasahassaṃ hoti.
268 「拔出时也是如此」:此处指脚踩下之后,尚未站稳之际,根本无法一下子拔出来。但这里的意思是:从下方开始被烧灼,从上方开始被焚烧,所以在踩下时,脚显现为被烧灼的样子;往上拔起时,情形完全一样,因此这样说。「已度过漫长时间」:是指已经度过了极多的百年、千年。显示巴利原文
268.Ubbhataṃ tādisameva hotīti ettha akkantapadaṃ yāva aṭṭhito daḷhaṃ uddharitumeva na sakkā. Ayaṃ panettha attho – heṭṭhato paṭṭhāya ḍayhati, uparito paṭṭhāya jhāyati, iti akkamanakāle ḍayhamānaṃ paññāyati, uddharaṇakāle tādisameva, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Bahusampattoti bahūni vassasatavassasahassāni sampatto.
那么,这个地狱为何名为「无间」呢?「vīci」意即间隔,而在那地狱中,火焰与火焰之间、有情与有情之间、苦与苦之间,全然没有任何间隔,因此称之为「无间」。譬如,彼狱东墙升起的火焰,交织着行进一百由旬,穿透西墙后,又向外延伸一百由旬;其余各方也是如此。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panesa narako avīcīti saṅkhaṃ gatoti. Vīci nāma antaraṃ vuccati, tattha ca aggijālānaṃ vā sattānaṃ vā dukkhassa vā antaraṃ natthi. Tasmā so avīcīti saṅkhaṃ gatoti. Tassa hi puratthimabhittito jālā uṭṭhitā saṃsibbamānā yojanasataṃ gantvā pacchimabhittiṃ vinivijjhitvā parato yojanasataṃ gacchati. Sesadisāsupi eseva nayo.
提婆达多便投生在这六种火焰的正中央。他的身体高达一百由旬,双足没入热铁地中,深至脚踝;双手没入热铁墙中,深至手腕;头部没入热铁顶盖中,深至眉毛处。一根铁桩从下方穿入,穿透身体后插入顶盖;从东墙穿出的铁桩穿透心脏,插入西墙;从北墙穿出的铁桩穿透肋骨,插入南墙。由于他对坚固不动的如来造下了罪行,自身也变得坚固不动,在那里承受着痛苦,这便是业报的显现。如此,由于火焰之间毫无间隔,故名无间。显示巴利原文
Imesaṃ channaṃ jālānaṃ majjhe nibbatto devadatto, tassa yojanasatappamāṇo attabhāvo, dve pādā yāva gopphakā lohapathaviṃ paviṭṭhā, dve hatthā yāva maṇibandhā lohabhittiyo paviṭṭhā, sīsaṃ yāva bhamukaṭṭhito lohachadane paviṭṭhaṃ, adhobhāgena ekaṃ lohasūlaṃ pavisitvā kāyaṃ vinivijjhantaṃ chadane paviṭṭhaṃ, pācīnabhittito nikkhantasūlaṃ hadayaṃ vinivijjhitvā pacchimabhittiṃ paviṭṭhaṃ , uttarabhittito nikkhantasūlaṃ phāsukā vinivijjhitvā dakkhiṇabhittiṃ paviṭṭhaṃ. Niccale tathāgatamhi aparaddhattā niccalova hutvā paccatīti kammasarikkhatāya ediso jāto. Evaṃ jālānaṃ nirantaratāya avīci nāma.
而在那地狱内部一百由旬的范围中,有情密集无间,犹如将粉末舂进竹筒般塞得严严实实。不能说「此处有有情,彼处无有情」。无论是正在行走、站立、坐着或躺卧的有情,彼此之间全无缝隙;行走者、站立者、坐着者、躺卧者,互相都不妨碍。就这样,因为有情之间毫无间隔,故名无间。显示巴利原文
Abbhantare panassa yojanasatike ṭhāne nāḷiyaṃ koṭṭetvā pūritapiṭṭhaṃ viya sattā nirantarā, ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne satto atthi, imasmiṃ natthī’’ti na vattabbaṃ, gacchantānaṃ ṭhitānaṃ nisinnānaṃ nipannānaṃ anto natthi, gacchante vā ṭhite vā nisinne vā nipanne vā aññamaññaṃ na bādhanti. Evaṃ sattānaṃ nirantaratāya avīci.
在身门当中,有六种与舍相应之心生起,一种与苦相应之心生起。即使如此,犹如在舌尖放上六滴蜂蜜,再放上一滴烧熔的铜汁,由于铜汁的烧灼力极强,唯有此铜汁的感受明显,其余六滴蜂蜜变得微不足道;同样,由于强猛的烧灼之力,在此处唯有苦受无有间断,其他感受皆微不足道。因苦受相续无间,故称无间。显示巴利原文
Kāyadvāre pana cha upekkhāsahagatāni cittāni uppajjanti, ekaṃ dukkhasahagataṃ. Evaṃ santepi yathā jivhagge cha madhubindūni ṭhapetvā ekasmiṃ tambalohabindumhi ṭhapite anudahanabalavatāya tadeva paññāyati, itarāni abbohārikāni honti, evaṃ anudahanabalavatāya dukkhamevettha nirantaraṃ, itarāni abbohārikānīti. Evaṃ dukkhassa nirantaratāya avīci.
269 「大」:指其身体有一百由旬之巨。它们堕落彼处时:一只脚踏在大地狱,另一只脚落入粪屎地狱。「针口」:意即嘴巴如针一般细小。那些有情的身体,有的如同象颈那样粗大,有的则如同一只独木舟的大小。显示巴利原文
269.Mahantoti yojanasatiko. So tattha patatīti eko pādo mahāniraye hoti, eko gūthaniraye nipatati. Sūcimukhāti sūcisadisamukhā, te hatthigīvappamāṇā ekadoṇikanāvāppamāṇā vā honti.
「煻煨地狱」:此地狱亦有一百由旬之大,内中充满炽燃的炭灰,其厚度约与尖顶屋等高。堕落其中的有情,如同被扔进谷壳堆中的犁头、斧子、石头等物,直沉至最底下。显示巴利原文
Kukkulanirayoti yojanasatappamāṇova anto kūṭāgāramattavitaccitaaṅgārapuṇṇo ādittachārikanirayo, yattha patitapatitā kudrūsakarāsimhi khittaphālavāsisilādīni viya heṭṭhimatalameva gaṇhanti.
「使(他们)爬上」:即用铁棍击打,逼迫他们向上爬。他们向上爬时,那些刺的尖端朝下;向下走时,刺的尖端朝上。显示巴利原文
Āropentīti ayadaṇḍehi pothentā āropenti. Tesaṃ ārohanakāle te kaṇṭakā adhomukhā honti, orohanakāle uddhaṃmukhā.
「被风吹动」:指被业力所生之风所吹动。「亦断手(足)」:就像在砧板上剁肉一般,持续不断地砍断手脚。如果站起来逃跑,铁墙便会合拢,把四周团团围住,下方的刀轮也同时生起。显示巴利原文
Vāteritānīti kammamayena vātena calitāni. Hatthampi chindantīti phalake maṃsaṃ viya koṭṭayamānāni chindanti. Sace uṭṭhāya palāyati, ayopākāro samuṭṭhahitvā parikkhipati, heṭṭhā khuradhārā samuṭṭhāti.
「灰水河」:即那条名为韦答拉尼的铜河。河中有铁质的粗砂粒和莲花叶,下方是刀轮,两岸长满了藤蔓与茅草。那个有情在那里遭受着剧烈、粗涩的痛苦:他被水流上下冲漂,在莲花叶上被割裂;被呈十字路口形状的粗砂尖刺穿刺;被刀轮切割;在两岸被茅草刮擦;被藤蔓拖曳;被锋利的矛劈裂。显示巴利原文
Khārodakā nadīti vetaraṇī nāma tambalohanadī. Tattha ayomayāni kharavālika-pokkharapattāni, heṭṭhā khuradhārā ubhosu tīresu vettalatā ca kusatiṇāni ca. So tattha dukkhā tibbā kharāti so tattha uddhañca adho ca vuyhamāno pokkharapattesu chijjati. Siṅghāṭakasaṇṭhānāya kharavālikāya kaṇṭakehi vijjhiyati, khuradhārāhi phāliyati, ubhosu tīresu kusatiṇehi vilekhati, vettalatāhi ākaḍḍhiyati, tikkhasattīhi phāliyati.
270 “以烧热的铁桩”:当他说“我饿了”时,狱卒们便用大铁筐盛满铁丸,靠近前来。他以为是食物,用牙去咬,那时狱卒们就用那烧热的铁桩撬开他的嘴,并用大铁锅盛着铜汁过来,强行灌下。“再次投入大地狱”:就这样,从五种束缚开始,一直折磨到饮铜汁;又从饮铜汁开始,重新施以五种束缚等刑罚,然后再次投入大地狱。这其中,有的有情仅受五种束缚便命终解脱,有的在第二种,有的在第三种,有的在饮铜汁时解脱;但只要业还没有完全灭尽,就仍会被投入大地狱。显示巴利原文
270.Tattenaayosaṅkunāti tena jigacchitomhīti vutte mahantaṃ lohapacchiṃ lohaguḷānaṃ pūretvā taṃ upagacchanti, so lohaguḷabhāvaṃ ñatvā dante samphuseti, athassa te tattena ayosaṅkunā mukhaṃ vivaranti, tambalohadhārehi mahantena lohakaṭāhena tambalohaṃ upanetvā evamevaṃ karonti. Puna mahānirayeti evaṃ pañcavidhabandhanato paṭṭhāya yāva tambalohapānā tambalohapānato paṭṭhāya puna pañcavidhabandhanādīni kāretvā mahāniraye pakkhipanti. Tattha koci pañcavidhabandhaneneva muccati, koci dutiyena, koci tatiyena, koci tambalohapānena muccati, kamme pana aparikkhīṇe puna mahāniraye pakkhipanti.
一位年轻比丘在学习这部经时,问道:“尊者,已经承受了这般痛苦的有情,还要再次被投入大地狱吗?”“是的,贤友,只要业未灭尽,他们就会一再地这样受苦。”“尊者,请您暂且停下经文讲授,只教我业处吧!”于是导师为他教授了业处,他证得入流果后,再回来学习经文。其他在这段经文处停下学习而证得阿拉汉果的,人数多到无法计算。而这部经,是所有的佛陀都始终不舍弃的。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pana suttaṃ gaṇhanto eko daharabhikkhu, – ‘‘bhante, ettakaṃ dukkhamanubhavitasattaṃ punapi mahāniraye pakkhipantī’’ti āha. Āma, āvuso, kamme aparikkhīṇe punappunaṃ evaṃ karontīti. Tiṭṭhatu, bhante, uddeso, kammaṭṭhānameva kathethāti kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathāpetvā sotāpanno hutvā āgamma uddesaṃ aggahesi. Aññesampi imasmiṃ padese uddesaṃ ṭhapetvā arahattaṃ pattānaṃ gaṇanā natthi. Sabbabuddhānañcetaṃ suttaṃ avijahitameva hoti.
271 “到达低劣之身”:即已投生低劣之身。“取”:指贪爱与邪见的执取。“为生与死之因”:成为生和死的因。“无取”:不执取四种取。“于生与死灭尽”:在名为生与死灭尽的涅槃中解脱。显示巴利原文
271.Hīnakāyūpagāti hīnakāyaṃ upagatā hutvā. Upādāneti taṇhādiṭṭhigahaṇe. Jātimaraṇasambhaveti jātiyā ca maraṇassa ca kāraṇabhūte. Anupādāti catūhi upādānehi anupādiyitvā. Jātimaraṇasaṅkhayeti jātimaraṇasaṅkhayasaṅkhāte nibbāne vimuccanti.
「于现法般涅槃」:即于现法、于此生之中,便以一切烦恼的灭尽而寂灭。「超越了一切苦」:即称为已超越一切苦。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhadhammābhinibbutāti diṭṭhadhamme imasmiṃyeva attabhāve sabbakilesanibbānena nibbutā. Sabbadukkhaṃ upaccagunti sabbadukkhātikkantā nāma honti.